573928
45
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/156
Next page
RCS-656HX
SX-SW505HX
S-ST606
DVR-545HX-S
Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer
Speaker System
DVD Recorder
®
Operating Instructions
Discover the benefits of registering your product online at
www.pioneer.co.uk
(www.pioneer-eur.com)
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product, but this
product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.
To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers
or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
The following caution label appears on your unit.
Location:
top and rear of the unit
D3-4-2-1-8_B_En
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. After
you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filed
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
or moisture.
D3-4-2-1-3_A_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light)
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
(73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives
(89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and
93/68/EEC).
D3-4-2-1-9a_En
WARNING
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230V
or 120V) written on the rear panel.
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
equipment.
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
warranty period.
K041_En
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.
Private households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential
negative effects on the environment and human health.
K058_En
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
on vacation).
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
POWER-CORD CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement.
S002_En
VENTILATION CAUTION (Receiver subwoofer)
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 5 cm at top, 5 cm at rear, and 5
cm at each side).
VENTILATION CAUTION (DVD Recorder)
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
5 cm
5 cm
5 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Receiver subwoofer DVD Recorder
4
En
Section One
Chapter 1
Contents
Section One
01 Contents............................................................
4
What’s in the box..........................................................4
02 Speaker Setup Guide .......................................
5
Safety precautions when setting up..............................5
Home theater sound setup ...........................................5
Wall mounting the center speaker................................7
Before mounting ........................................................7
Additional notes on speaker placement........................7
03 Connecting up ..................................................
8
Basic connections........................................................ 8
Using this system for TV audio.................................... 11
04 Remote control...............................................
12
Using the remote control............................................14
Putting the batteries in the remote control .................15
05 Before you start .............................................
16
Switching on .............................................................. 16
Setting up...................................................................16
Basic operation ..........................................................17
Watching a DVD ...................................................... 17
Listening to a CD...................................................... 17
Watching a title recorded on the HDD .....................17
Listening to the radio ............................................... 17
Section Two
Operating instructions for the Audio
Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer and
Speaker System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Section Three
Operating instructions for the DVD
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
What’s in the box
Please confirm that the following items are all supplied.
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW505HX) box:
Remote control (page 12)
AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) x2
(page 15)
Display unit (page 20)
Power cord (page 10)
AM loop antenna (page 8)
FM wire antenna (page 8)
Control cable (page 8)
Display cable (page 8)
Coaxial cable (page 8)
Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 21)
These operating instructions
Warranty card
DVD recorder (DVR–545HX-S) box:
Remote control
AA/R6 dry cell batteries x2
Audio / video cable (red/white/yellow) (page 11)
G-LINK™ cable (page 49)
RF antenna cable x2 (1.5 m and 30 cm) (page 11)
Power cord (page 11)
Operating instructions
Warranty card
Speakers (S–ST606) box:
Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x1) (page 10)
Speaker cables x5 (page 9)
Non-skid pads (large) x4 (page 5)
Non-skid pads (large) x16 (page 5)
Non-skid pads (small) x4 (page 5)
Speaker stand bases x4 (page 5)
Screws (for bases) x12 (page 5)
Speaker Setup Guide
5
En
Chapter 2
Speaker Setup Guide
Safety precautions when setting up
When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on
their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a
stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing
the speakers.
Home theater sound setup
This is a standard multichannel surround sound
speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater
sound.
1 Attach the speaker stand bases to the stems
using the screws provided.
Once you have aligned the stem and base, secure with
the small screws at the points shown below. Note that
the speaker should face in the direction of the base of the
isosceles triangle (outlined below).
2 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of
the center speaker. The large non-skid pads are for
the front and surround speakers, and the receiver
subwoofer (as shown).
Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the
base (flat surface) of each speaker.
Front
left
Receiver subwoofer
Front
right
Surround
left
Surround
right
Center
Listening position
Rear
Front
Speaker Setup Guide
6
En
3 Secure each of the front and surround speakers
using the metal catch provided.
Screw two picture hooks or similar into the wall behind
the speaker. Pass a chain or cord around the hooks and
through the metal catch so that the speaker is stabilized
(make sure to test that it supports the weight of the
speaker).
After installing, make sure the speaker is securely fixed.
Caution
The metal catch is not a mounting fixture, and the
speaker should not be hung directly from the wall
using this catch. Always use a chain or cord when
stabilizing the speaker.
Pioneer disclaims all responsibility for any losses or
damage resulting from improper assembly,
installation, insufficient strength of the installation
materials, misuse, or natural disasters.
4 Connect the speaker system.
Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly.
After connecting everything, place the speakers as
shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound.
After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup
(page 21) to complete your surround sound setup.
Non-skid pads
(large) x 4
Non-skid pads
(small) x 4
Non-skid pads
(large) x 16
Center speaker
Receiver subwoofer
Front and Surround speakers
Metal catch
Chain or cord
Speaker Setup Guide
7
En
Wall mounting the center speaker
The center speaker has a mounting hole which can be
used to mount the speaker on the wall.
Before mounting
Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that
its weight could cause the screws to work loose, or
the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the
speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to
mount the speakers on is strong enough to support
them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls.
Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws
suitable for the wall material and support the weight
of the speaker.
Caution
If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the
wall, consult a professional for advice.
Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or
damage that result from improper installation
Additional notes on speaker placement
Install the main front left and right speakers at an
equal distance from the TV.
Install the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen.
Precautions:
When installing the center speaker on top of the TV,
be sure to secure it with tape or some other suitable
means. Otherwise, the speaker may fall from the TV
due to external shocks such as earthquakes,
endangering those nearby or damaging the speaker.
The front (L/R), center and surround (L/R) speakers
supplied with this system are magnetically shielded.
However, depending on the installation location,
color distortion may occur if the speaker is installed
extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this
happens, turn the power switch of the television set
OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the
problem persists, place the speaker system away
from the television set.
The receiver subwoofer is not magnetically shielded
and so should not be placed near a TV or monitor.
Magnetic storage media (such as floppy discs and
tape or video cassettes) should also not be kept close
to the receiver subwoofer.
Do not attach the front, surround speakers and
receiver subwoofer to the wall or ceiling. They may
fall off and cause injury.
For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare
speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals.
Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other
amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire.
Do not connect any speakers other than those
supplied to this system.
5 mm to 7 mm
5 mm
10 mm
Connecting up
8
En
Chapter 3
Connecting up
Basic connections
Important
When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power
cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.
Note
When using the display unit in a wall-mounted
location, take full precautions to prevent the unit
from accidentally falling.
Screws and other fixtures for use in wall mounting
are not included.
WARNING
Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents
resulting from faulty assembly or installation,
insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting
fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural
disasters.
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
Y
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
SPEAKERS
DVD/DVR 2
(OPTICAL)
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND
DVD/DVR 1
(COAXIAL)
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANTENNA
FM
UNBAL
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
75
ANALOG
DIGITAL
(OPTICAL)
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
CONTROL IN
MCACC
SETUP MIC
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
AM loop antenna
Display unit
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW505HX)
3
Display cable
2
FM antenna
4
DVD Recorder
(DVR-545HX-S)
Coaxial cable Control cable
1
a b
Connecting up
9
En
1 Connect the DVD recorder to the receiver
subwoofer.
a. Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT jack
on the rear of the receiver subwoofer.
Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN
jack on the rear of the DVD recorder.
b. Plug the coaxial cable into the DIGITAL AUDIO
INPUT (DVD/DVR 1) jack on the rear of the receiver
subwoofer.
Plug the other end of the cable into the COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT jack on the rear of the DVD recorder.
2 Connect the display unit to the receiver subwoofer.
Plug the L-shaped end of the display cable into the
connector on the rear of the display unit, then plug the
other end of the display cable into SYSTEM CONNECTOR
jack on the receiver subwoofer.
3 Assemble the AM loop antenna.
a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow.
b. Clip the loop onto the stand.
c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform
step b after first securing the stand with screws.
It is recommended that you determine the reception
strength before securing the stand with the screws.
4 Connect the AM and FM antennas
1
.
a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM
antenna terminal
2
.
For each terminal, press down on the tab to open;
insert the wire, then release to secure.
b. Push the FM antenna
3
plug onto the center pin of the
FM antenna socket.
5 Connect each speaker.
Each speaker cable has a color-coded connector at
one end and two wires at the other end.
Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire.
Connect the wires to the speaker. Match the colored
wired with the color-coded label (model label), then
insert the colored wire into the red (+) side and the
other wire into the black () side.
Note that unless the control cable is connected,
you can’t use the remote control with the DVD recorder.
a b c
Note
1• Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and DVD recorder.
• If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 26 or Connecting
external antennas on page 30.
2• Don’t let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances.
• The signal earth () is designed to reduce noise that occurs when an antenna is connected. It is not an electrical safety earth.
• If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal.
• For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna.
3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit.
2
1
Color-coded wire
(Connect to speaker)
Color-coded connector
(Connect to rear panel)
Connecting up
10
En
Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker
terminals on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. Make
sure to insert completely.
The small lug at the wire-end of the speaker plug
should face up or down depending on whether it’s
being plugged into one of the upper or lower speaker
terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly.
6 Connect the subwoofer cable.
Just below the subwoofer speaker, to the left of
center, you should see the subwoofer connecting
cable. Plug this into the SUBWOOFER SPEAKER
terminal.
Caution
These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
Do not connect any speakers other than those
supplied to this system.
Do not connect the supplied speakers to any
amplifier other than the one supplied with this
system. Connection to any other amplifier may result
in malfunction or fire.
SPEAKERS
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND
DVD/DVR 1
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANTENNA
FM
UNBAL
AM
LOOP A NTENNA75
ANALOG
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
CONTROL IN
MCACC
SETUP MIC
DVD/DVR 2
(OPTICAL)
DIGITAL
(OPTICAL)
Front right
(Red)
Front left
(White)
Surround left
(Blue)
Surround right
(Gray)
Listening position
Center (Green)
8
6 5
To AC outlet
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW505HX)
Speaker system (S-ST606)
Upper terminal Lower terminal
Connecting up
11
En
7 Connect the DVD recorder to your TV.
1
Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on
your TV.
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable
for the video connection.
Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/
video cable for the audio connection. Make sure you
match the left and right outputs with their
corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 47 to connect
the antenna.
8 Connect the power cord.
2
Connect the power cords to AC inlets on the receiver
subwoofer and DVD recorder. Connect the power
cords to a wall socket.
Using this system for TV audio
If your TV has a stereo audio output you can connect it to
this system and enjoy surround TV sound.
1 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks on your TV to
the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks on the receiver
subwoofer.
Use the red/white stereo audio cable (not supplied) for
this connection. Make sure you match the left and right
outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct
stereo sound.
You can use the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks for
any analog source you want, such as a tape deck, etc.
Note
1 Other types of video connection are possible. See page 48 to page 50 for more on this.
2• Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system.
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system.
TV
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
SPEAKERS
DVD/DVR 2
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND
DVD/DVR 1
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANALOG
OPTICAL
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
1
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (R GB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
Y
8
7
7
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL) IN
RF antenna
cable
RF antenna
cable
RF antenna
cable
ANTENNA IN
ANTENNA
OUT
Audio/video cable
(red/white/yellow)
DVD Recorder
(DVR-545HX-S)
To AC outlet
Remote control
12
En
Chapter 4
Remote control
Important
Functions printed in green on the remote control are
accessed by switching the MAIN/SUB switch to SUB.
1 RECORDER
Press to switch the recorder on or into standby.
2 RECEIVER
Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on or into standby.
3 Input select buttons
HDD/DVD (page 82)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for
recording or playback. The receiver subwoofer’s
audio input is also switched to DVD/DVR1.
1
FM/AM (page 26)
Press to select the built-in radio tuner.
AUDIO IN (page 30)
Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver
subwoofer’s audio inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2,
DIGITAL or ANALOG).
4 SOUND RETRIEVER
Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio
sources (page 24).
5 Playback controls (page 88)
PAUSE
Press to pause playback or recording.
PLAY
Press to start playback.
STOP
Press to stop playback.
6 Recording controls (page 82)
ì REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE
Plus+™ screen, use for One-Button-Record.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
7 INFO
While watching D.TV, press to display the information
banner.
Press to see additional information for the highlighted
item in the EPG.
RECORDER
HDD/DVD
PAUSE PLAY STOP
REC
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
CM
BACK
PAUSE
LIVE TV
RETURN
/ EXIT
CM
SKIP
STOP REC
HOME MENU
ENTER
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
CHANNEL
+
PREV
AUDIO
SET UP
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
TV CONTROL
RDS DISP
VOLUME
TEXT A.TV/D.TV
DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
/TUNE
+
ENTER
/ /
SUBTITLE ANGLE
TIMER REC REC MODE
PLAY MODE
NEXT
VOLUME
FM/AM
SOUND
RETRIEVER
AUDIO IN
RECEIVER

ì
/TUNE
/ST
/ST
+
123
456
78
0
++
––
9
1
3
5
6
9
12
13
15
17
19
22
27
29
2
4
14
20
21
23
24
25
26
28
16
7
10
8
18
11
OPEN
OPEN
Note
1 If the recorder is set to remote mode 2 or 3, the receiver subwoofer’s audio input will not be switched. See also Remote Control Mode on
page 138.
Remote control
13
En
8 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.
9 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 91,
101
) / TOP MENU
(page 89)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top
menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/RW (Video) disc
is loaded.
10 GUIDE
Press to display the EPG screen; press again to exit.
11 HOME MENU
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
navigate many functions of the system.
12 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to navigate all DVD recorder on-screen displays.
Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted
option.
While watching D.TV press ENTER to display the
Channel List screen.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward
through the audio or video playing.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward
through the audio or video playing.
13 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 83)
Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with
playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.
14 RETURN/EXIT
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
Also press to exit the MHEG application.
15 PREV / NEXT
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu
page.
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the
previous/next page.
CHANNEL +/– (page 80)
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.
16 VOLUME +/–
Use to adjust the volume.
17 Colour buttons
(RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE)
Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned
to a data channel of a digital broadcast. The function
of each button will be described on-screen, and
changes depending on the screen being displayed.
AUDIO (page 81, 96)
Press to change the audio language or channel.
(When the recorder is stopped, press to change the
tuner audio.)
SUBTITLE (page 95)
Press to display/change the subtitles included in
multilingual DVD-Video discs.
ANGLE (page 96)
Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi-
angle scenes.
PLAY MODE (page 93)
Press to change the play mode (search, repeat,
program play, etc.).
18 TIMER REC (page 63)
Press to set a timer recording from the GUIDE Plus+™
system.
19 / (page 93)
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
/, /(page 93)
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion
playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback
speed.
While paused, press to advance a single frame in
either direction.
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the
previous/next day.
20 REC MODE (page 82)
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture
quality).
21 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 110)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
22 Number buttons
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title
selection; channel selection, and so on.
/// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to control receiver functions.
SETUP
Use to access the menu system for surround sound
setup, tuner settings and so on (page 21, 26, 27, 28,
33).
SR+
Use to setup the SR+ features and to select the SR+
mode (page 32).
MCACC
Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 21).
TEST TONE
Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup)
(page 29).
SURROUND
Use to select a Surround mode (page 23).
SLEEP
Press to set the sleep timer (page 33).
Remote control
14
En
ADVANCED
Use to select a Pioneer original surround mode
(page 24).
SOUND (page 25)
Press to access the sound menu, from which you can
adjust bass and treble, etc.
CLEAR
Press to clear an entry and start again.
23 MENU (page 89)
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized
DVD-R/-RW or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc is loaded.
When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, use to jump directly
to the Menu bar.
24 VIDEO IN (page 85)
Press to change the DVD recorder input for recording
and playback.
25 TV/DVD
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,
in which you get picture and sound from the system’s
tuner (or an external input).
26 JUKEBOX (page 116)
Press to display the Jukebox screen of the DVD recorder,
from where you can copy music to the HDD for playback.
27 TV CONTROL (page 140)
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.
TEXT
Starts the MHEG application display, if available,
while watching a digital channel (UK only).
A.TV/D.TV
Switches between analog TV antenna input and
digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV
indicators on the front panel show which is selected.
28 DISPLAY (page 97)
Displays/changes the on-screen information
displays.
RDS DISP
Changes RDS displays (page 27).
29
MAIN
/
SUB
Change from MAIN to SUB to access the green
functions/commands on the remote.
Using the remote control
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
When the batteries run down or you change the
batteries, the remote control mode is reset to
Recorder 1. See Remote Control Mode on page 138.
Use within the operating range in front of the remote
control sensor on the display unit, as shown.
30
30
7 m
Remote control
15
En
Putting the batteries in the remote
control
1 Open the battery compartment cover on the
back of the remote control.
2 Insert two AA/R6 batteries into the battery
compartment following the indications (,) inside
the compartment.
3 Close the cover.
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such
as leakage and bursting. Please observe the
following:
Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
Don’t use different kinds of battery together—
although they may look similar, different batteries
may have different voltages.
Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each
battery match the indications in the battery
compartment.
Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to
be used for a month or more.
When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
Before you start
16
En
Chapter 5
Before you start
Switching on
The DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver subwoofer
is located on the display unit.
The table below shows what needs to be switched on for
various system functions:
Setting up
After connecting and installing the DVD recorder and
receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set the
system up for use.
DVD recorder
Set the date and time, TV channel tuning and the type
of TV in the Setup Navigator (page 56).
Receiver subwoofer
Switch off the display demo mode (page 21).
Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the
surround sound (page 21).
HDD/DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
STANDBY/ON
S-VIDEO
COPYHDMIPLTVDivXD.T VA.TV
VIDEO L(MONO) R
AUDIO
INPUT 2
ONE TOUCH
COPY
CH
ì REC
+
A.TV/D.TVHELP
INPUT
SELECT
PAUSE
LIVE TV
DV IN
USB
DVD Recorder (DVR-545HX-S)
Display unit
STANDBY/ON
– VOLUME + AUDIO INPUT SURROUND
Remote Control
RECORDER
HDD/DVD
PAUSE PLAY STOP
REC
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
CM
BACK
PAU SE
LIVE TV
RETURN
/EXIT
CM
SKIP
STOP REC
HOME MENU
ENTER
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
CHANNEL
+
PREV
AUDIO
SET UP
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
TV CONTROL
RDS DISP
VOLUME
TEXT A.TV/D.TV
DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
/TUNE
+
ENTER
/ /
SUBTITLE ANGLE
TIMER REC REC MODE
PLAY MODE
NEXT
VOLUME
FM/AM
SOUND
RETRIEVER
AUDIO IN
RECEIVER

ì
/TUNE
/ST
/ST
+
123
456
78
0
++
––
9
Function
Display unit
DVD recorder
DVD playback On On
CD playback On On
HDD playback On On
Radio On Off
Timer recording Off On
Before you start
17
En
Basic operation
This manual is split into to parts, one covering using the
receiver subwoofer, the other using the DVD recorder.
Below are some common operations and where to find
them explained in this manual.
Watching a DVD
Remember that when using the remote to control the
DVD recorder, you should point the remote towards the
display unit, not the recorder itself.
1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Switch on the DVD recorder.
3 Switch on your TV.
Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct
video input.
4 Press HDD/DVD.
5 Press OPEN/CLOSE on the DVD recorder to
open the disc tray.
6 Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-
sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play
face-down).
7 Press (play) to start playback.
See Basic playback on page 88 for more on playing discs.
8 Adjust the volume.
9 Adjust the sound using the surround effects.
See Listening to your system on page 23 for details.
Listening to a CD
1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Switch on the DVD recorder.
3 Press HDD/DVD.
4 Load a CD and start playback (page 90).
5 Adjust the volume.
6 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 23).
Watching a title recorded on the HDD
1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Switch on the DVD recorder.
3 Switch on your TV.
4 Press HDD/DVD.
5 Start playback of the HDD title (page 89).
6 Adjust the volume.
7 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 23).
Listening to the radio
1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Tune to a station (page 26).
3 Adjust the volume.
4 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 23).
RECORDER
HDD/DVD
PAU SE PLAY STOP
REC
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
CM
BACK
PAU SE
LIVE TV
RETURN
CM
SKIP
STOP REC
HOME MENU
ENTER
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
CHANNEL
+
CHANNEL
PREV
AUDIO
SET UP SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
/TUNE+
/ /
SUBTITLE ANGLE
TIMER REC REC MODE
PLAY MODE
NEXT VOLUME
FM/AM
SOUND
RETRIEVER
AUDIO IN
RECEIVER


ì
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing . (Press again to
cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
18
En
SX-SW505H
X
S-ST606
Section Two
19
En
Contents
01 Controls and displays
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
02 Getting started
System demo setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround
sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
03 Listening to your system
Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using Advanced Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using the Sound Retriever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . . 25
Enhancing dialogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes . . . . . . . 25
Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
04 Listening to the radio
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Improving poor AM sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Changing the noise cut mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using RDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Displaying RDS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Searching for RDS programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
05 Surround sound settings
Using the Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Channel level setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Speaker distance setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Dynamic Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dual mono setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone . . . 29
06 Other connections
Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting an analog audio component. . . . . . . . 30
Listening to an external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display . . . . . 31
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays . . . . . . . . 31
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma
display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
07 Additional information
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DTS CD setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Setting the sleep timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Tuner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Controls and displays
01
20
En
Chapter 1
Controls and displays
Display unit
1 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the system on/into standby.
2 Front panel display
See below for details.
3 VOLUME buttons
Use to adjust the volume.
4 AUDIO INPUT (page 30)
Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio
inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG).
5 SURROUND
Use to select a Surround mode (page 23).
6 IR remote sensor (page 14)
Display
1
DTS
Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 23).
2 SURR.
Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening
modes is selected (page 24).
3 SOUND
Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 24).
4 Tuner indicators
– Lights when a broadcast is being received.
– Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being
received in auto stereo mode.
– Lights when FM mono reception is selected.
– Lights when in one of the RDS display or search
modes.
5 kHz / MHz
Indicates the frequency unit shown in the character
display (kHz for AM, MHz for FM).
6 Character display
7
Lights when sleep timer is active (page 33).
8
2
PL II
Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 23).
9
2
D
Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source
(page 23)
.
STANDBY/ON
– VOLUME + AUDIO INPUT SURROUND
1 4 652 3
2PL
2D
kHz
MHz
SOUND
DTS SURR.
5 4
2 3
789
6
1
Getting started
02
21
En
Chapter 2
Getting started
Important
To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
System demo setting
Switches the automatic demo feature on or off (this
starts when you plug in for the first time).
1 Switch the system into standby.
2 Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select DEMO from the
menu, then press ENTER.
4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then
press ENTER.
Select from:
DEMO ON – Switches the demo display on.
DEMO OFF – Switches the demo display off and the
system into standby.
Using the Auto MCACC setup for
optimal surround sound
The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system
measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening
area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for
channel delay and channel level. After you have set up
the microphone provided, the system uses the
information from a series of test tones to optimize the
speaker settings and equalization (Acoustic Calibration
EQ) for your particular room.
1
Important
The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud;
however, do not turn the volume down during setup
as this may result in a sub-optimal setup.
Make sure the microphone and speakers are not
moved during the MCACC setup.
1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP
MIC jack on the rear panel.
AUDIO
SETUP
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
/TUNE+
ENTER
/ /
SUBTITLE ANGLE
TIMER REC REC MODE
PLAY MODE
/TUNE
/ST /ST+
123
456
789
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
++
––
Note
1 You only need to use the Auto MCACC setup once (unless you change the placement of your speakers or your room layout).
RECORDER
HDD/DVD
PAUSE PLAY STOP
REC
TOP MENU
DISC
STOP REC
HOME MENU
INFOHELP
FM/AM
SOUND
RETRIEVER
AUDIO IN
RECEIVER


ì
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT CHANNEL VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
/TUNE
+
/ /
TIMER REC REC MODE
/TUNE
/ST
/ST
+
123
456
78
0
++
9
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
++
––
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
SPEAKERS
DVD/DVR 2
(OPTICAL)
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND
DVD/DVR 1
(COAXIAL)
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANTENNA
FM
UNBAL
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
75
ANALOG
DIGITAL
(OPTICAL)
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
CONTROL IN
MCACC
SETUP MIC
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
MCACC
SETUP MIC
Getting started
02
22
En
2 Place the microphone at your normal listening
position.
Place it about ear height, and make sure it is level by
using a table or chair.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers
and the microphone.
3
If the receiver subwoofer is off, press RECEIVER
to turn the power on.
4 Press MCACC.
Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC. The
volume increases automatically and the system outputs
a series of test tones.
To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished,
press MCACC. The unit will continue to use the
previous settings.
If the ambient noise level is too high, NOISY blinks in
the display for five seconds. To exit and check the
noise levels
1
, press MCACC, or to try again, press
ENTER when RETRY shows in the display.
If you see an ERR MIC or ERR SP message in the
display, there may be a problem with your mic or the
speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER
when you see RETRY
2
.
When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level
returns to normal, COMPLETE
3
shows in the display, and
Acoustic Calibration EQ is activated.
4
Note
1• If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speak-
ers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be
affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup.
2 If this doesn’t work, press MCACC, turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the ERR message, then try the Auto MCACC setup
again.
3 If COMPLETE doesn’t appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again.
4 See Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 25 to switch on/off Acoustic Calibration EQ.
Listening to your system
03
23
En
Chapter 3
Listening to your system
Important
To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
Auto listening mode
The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to
any source as it was mastered: the output from the
speakers mirrors the channels in the source material.
Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening
mode.
If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D
or DTS indicator lights.
You can also use the SURROUND button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
Listening in surround sound
You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in
surround sound. Surround sound is generated from
stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic
decoding modes.
Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening
mode.
You can also use the SURROUND button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
The choices that appear in the display will vary according
to the type of source that’s playing.
If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel 2 D
or DTS indicator lights.
AUTO – Auto listening mode (see above)
DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic) – 4.1 channel surround
sound for use with any two-channel source
MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) – 5.1 channel
surround sound, especially suited to movie sources,
for use with any two-channel source
MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) – 5.1 channel
surround sound, especially suited to music sources,
for use with any two-channel source; see Dolby Pro
Logic II Music settings below
STEREO – See Listening in stereo on page 24
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings
When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see
above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center
Width, Dimension, and Panorama.
1 With Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press
SOUND.
2 Use / to select C WIDTH, DIMEN. or
PANORAMA then press ENTER.
C WIDTH (Center Width) – Provides a better blend of
the front speakers by spreading the center channel
between the front right and left speakers, making it
sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower
settings).
DIMEN. (Dimension) – Adjusts the depth of the
surround sound balance from front to back, making
the sound more distant (minus settings), or more
forward (positive settings).
PANORAMA – Extends the front stereo image to
include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’
effect.
3 Use / to adjust the setting then press ENTER
to confirm.
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST
TONE VIDEO
IN
/TUNE
78
0
++
––
9
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST
TONE VIDEO
IN
/TUNE
78
0
++
––
9
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE
/ST /ST+
123
456
78
0
++
9
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
++
––
Listening to your system
03
24
En
Using Advanced Surround
The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any
multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional
surround sound effects.
Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced Surround
mode.
Press repeatedly to select:
ADVMOVIE – Suitable for movies
ADVMUSIC – Suitable for music
EXPANDED – Wide sound field
TV SURR. – Surround sound for mono or stereo TV
broadcasts
SPORTS – Suitable for sports programming
GAME – Suitable for TV game units
VIRTUAL – A virtual surround effect using just the
subwoofer and front speakers.
5 STEREO – Powerful surround sound for stereo
music sources
FRTMOVIE / FRTMUSIC / EXTPOWER – These
modes cannot be used.
Listening in stereo
You can listen to any source—stereo or multichannel—in
stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all
channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers
and the subwoofer.
Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows
in the display.
You can also use the SURROUND button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
Using the Sound Retriever
When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA
compression process, sound quality often suffers from
an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature
employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality
sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring
sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over
after compression.
Tip
This feature is effective when used together with the
Jukebox function of the DVD recorder.
While listening to a stereo source, press SOUND
RETRIEVER.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
RTRV ON — Switches the Sound Retriever on.
RTRV OFF — Switches the Sound Retriever off.
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
78
0
++
––
9
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
78
0
++
––
9
RECORDER
HDD/DVD
PAUSE PLAY STOP
FM/AM
SOUND
RETRIEVER
AUDIO IN
RECEIVER


Listening to your system
03
25
En
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ
You can listen to sources using the Acoustic Calibration
EQ set in Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal
surround sound on page 21.
1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select MCACC EQ then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to switch EQ ON or EQ OFF
then press ENTER to confirm.
On the EQ OFF setting, equalization is set to off and
speaker settings (channel delay and channel level)
remains as it is set.
Acoustic Calibration EQ is set to on automatically
after Auto MCACC setup is used.
Enhancing dialogue
The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make
the dialogue stand out from other background sounds in
a TV or movie sound track.
1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select DIALOGUE then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select the amount
dialogue enhancement then press ENTER to confirm.
Select between OFF, MID or MAX.
Using Quiet and Midnight listening
modes
The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or
treble in a sound source.
The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear
effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels.
1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press
ENTER.
3
Use the / buttons to select QUIET or MIDNIGHT
then press ENTER to confirm.
To cancel the Quiet or Midnight listening modes,
select BASS/TRE.
Adjusting the bass and treble
Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone.
1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press
ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select BASS/TRE then
press ENTER.
Selecting BASS/TRE cancels the Quiet and Midnight
listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the
same time.
4 Use the / buttons to select BASS or TREBLE;
use the / buttons to adjust the sound then press
ENTER to confirm.
Boosting the bass level
There are two bass modes you can use to enhance the
bass in a source.
1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select BASSMODE then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select the sound then
press ENTER to confirm.
Select between OFF, MUSIC or CINEMA.
SET UP
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
ENTER
/ /
TIMER REC REC MODE
123
456
78
0
++
––
9
Listening to the radio
04
26
En
Chapter 4
Listening to the radio
Important
To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
Listening to the radio
The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and
lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don’t have
to manually tune in every time you want to listen.
1 Press
FM/AM
to switch to the tuner, then press
repeatedly to select the FM or AM band.
The display shows the band and frequency.
2 Tune to a frequency.
There are three tuning modes—manual, auto, and high-
speed:
Manual tuning – Press TUNE +/– repeatedly to
change the displayed frequency.
Auto tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until the
frequency display starts to move, then release. The
tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to
keep searching.
High-speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE +/– until
the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the
button held down until you reach the frequency you
want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the
manual tuning method.
Improving poor FM reception
If you’re listening to an FM station in stereo but the
reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by
switching to mono.
1 Tune to an FM radio station then press
SETUP
.
2 Use the
/
buttons to choose FM MODE then
press
ENTER
.
3 Use the
/
buttons to select
FM MONO
then
press
ENTER
.
The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono
reception mode.
Select FM AUTO above to switch back to auto-stereo
mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a
stereo broadcast).
Improving poor AM sound
The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM
radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched
off. Also try changing the position and direction of the
AM loop antenna.
Changing the noise cut mode
If you find that the sound quality is bad even after trying
the above, you may be able to improve it using a different
noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best.
1 Tune to an AM radio station then press SETUP.
2
Use the
/
buttons
to choose NOISECUT then
press ENTER.
3
Use the
/
buttons
to select a Noise cut mode
(1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER.
Memorizing stations
You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always
have easy access to your favorite stations without having
to tune in manually each time.
RECORDER
HDD/DVD
PAUSE PLAY STOP
REC
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
CM
BACK
PAU SE
LIVE TV
RETURN
CM
SKIP
STOP REC
HOME MENU
ENTER
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
CHANNEL
+
CHANNEL
PREV
AUDIO
SET UP
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
/TUNE
+
ENTER
/ /
SUBTITLE ANGLE
TIMER REC REC MODE
PLAY MODE
NEXT VOLUME
FM/AM
SOUND
RETRIEVER
AUDIO IN

ì
/TUNE
/ST
/ST
+
123
456
78
0
++
––
9
Listening to the radio
04
27
En
1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station.
For the FM band, select mono or auto-stereo reception as
necessary. This setting is saved along with the preset.
2 Press
SETUP
.
3 Use the
/
buttons to choose ST.MEM. then
press
ENTER
.
4 Use the
/
buttons to select the station preset
you want then press
ENTER
.
Listening to station presets
1Make sure the tuner function is selected.
2 Use the
ST +/–
buttons to select a station preset.
Alternatively, use the number buttons to select a
preset directly.
Using RDS
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information—the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.
You can search the following program types:
1
Displaying RDS information
You can display the different types of RDS information
available.
2
Press
RDS DISP
for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the radio
station.
Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
SEARCH – PTY search (see below)
Current tuner frequency
Searching for RDS programs
You can search for a program type listed above.
1 Press the
FM/AM
button for the FM band.
3
2 Press
RDS DISP
repeatedly until SEARCH appears in
the display.
3 Use the
/
buttons to select the program type
you want to hear.
4 Press
ENTER
to start the search.
The system searches the station presets for a match. If it
finds one, searching stops for 5 sec.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press
ENTER
within the 5 seconds.
If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes.
NEWS – News
AFFAIRS – Current Affairs
INFO
– General Information
SPORT – Sport
EDUCATE – Educational
DRAMA – Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE – National or regional
culture, theater, etc.
SCIENCE – Science and
technology
VARIED – Usually talk-based
material, such as quiz shows or
interviews.
POP M – Pop music
ROCK M – Rock music
EASY M – Easy listening
LIGHT M – ‘Light’ classical music
CLASSICS – ‘Serious’ classical
music
OTHER M – Music not fitting
above categories
WEATHER – Weather reports
FINANCE – Stock market reports,
commerce, trading, etc.
CHILDREN – Programs for
children
SOCIAL – Social affairs
RELIGION – Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN – Public expressing
their views by phone
TRAVEL – Holiday-type travel
rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE – Leisure interests and
hobbies
JAZZ – Jazz
COUNTRY
– Country music
NATION M – Popular music in a
language other than English
OLDIES – Popular music from the
’50s and ’60s
FOLK M – Folk music
DOCUMENT
– Documentary
Note
1 In addition, there are three other program types, TEST, ALARM, and NO TYPE. ALARM and TEST are used for emergency announcements.
You can’t search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO TYPE appears when a program type can-
not be found.
2• If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see NO DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the
PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
• In the PTY display, NO DATA or NO TYPE may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.
3 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE
/ST /ST+
123
456
78
0
++
––
9
ENTER
456
Surround sound settings
05
28
En
Chapter 5
Surround sound settings
Important
To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
Using the Setup menu
From the Setup menu you can access all the surround
sound settings of the system
1
, including channel levels,
speaker distances, dynamic range adjustment and dual
mono audio playback.
Use the following buttons to use the Setup menu.
Channel level setting
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 21) should give you
the best surround sound setup. However you may find
that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can
improve the surround sound in your listening room.
This method of setting the channel levels allows you to
listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback
channel. Note that the channel level settings for stereo
playback are independent of the settings for surround
sound playback.
A further method of setting the channel levels is to use
the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels
using the test tone on page 29 for more on this.
1 Select stereo or multichannel playback for a source.
2 Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select CH LEVEL, then
press ENTER.
4 Use / to select a channel; / to adjust the
level of that channel.
You can adjust the level of each channel by ± 10 dB.
If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, or a stereo
source is playing in Auto mode, you will not be able
to adjust the center or surround channels.
5 Press ENTER when you’re finished.
If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Speaker distance setting
The Auto MCACC feature (see page 21) should give you
the best surround sound setup. However you may find
that by further adjustment of the speaker distance
settings you can improve the surround sound in your
listening room.
Set the distance of each speaker from your normal
listening position.
1 Press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to select DISTANCE, then
press ENTER.
3 Use / to select a speaker; / to adjust the
distance.
Adjust the following speakers:
L – Front left speaker
C – Center speaker
R – Front right speaker
SR – Surround right speaker
SL – Surround left speaker
SW – Subwoofer
Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.3 m to 9.0 m.
4 Press ENTER when you’re finished.
If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Note
1 There are other settings you can adjust from the Setup menu; these are explained in Listening to the radio on page 26 and
Additional information
on page 33.
SETUP
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
ENTER
/ /
TIMER REC REC MODE
123
456
78
0
++
––
9
Surround sound settings
05
29
En
Dynamic Range Control
1
When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low
volume, low level sounds—including some of the
dialog—can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the
Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by
bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high
level peaks.
Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital
soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks.
1 Press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to select DRC, then press
ENTER.
3 Use / to select a setting.
Select one of the following:
DRC OFF (default) – No dynamic range adjustment
(use when listening at higher volume)
DRC MID – Mid setting
DRC HIGH – Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds
are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are
increased)
4 Press ENTER to exit.
Dual mono setting
2
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS
soundtracks should be played. You can also use this
setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs
recorded with bilingual audio.
1 Press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to select DUALMONO,
then press ENTER.
3 Use / to select a setting.
Select one of the following:
CH1 MONO (default) – Only channel 1 is played
CH2 MONO – Only channel 2 is played
CH1/CH2 – Both channels are played through the
front speakers
4 Press ENTER to exit.
Adjusting the channel levels using
the test tone
If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test
tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see
Channel level setting on page 28). A test tone is played
through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the
level as it plays.
Note that the channel level settings for stereo sources
are independent of the settings for surround sound
sources.
1 Press SURROUND to select the Auto listening
mode.
If you want to set the channel levels for stereo (two
channel) playback, select the STEREO listening
mode.
2 Press TEST TONE.
The test tone is output from each speaker in turn.
3 While a test tone is playing, use the / buttons
to adjust that channel level.
The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test
tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can
adjust the level of each channel by ± 10 dB.
You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output
using the VOLUME +/– buttons (this does not affect
the channel level settings).
If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, you will not
be able to adjust the center or surround channels.
Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer
produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We
suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening
to a source. See the method described in Channel
level setting on page 28.
4 When you’re done, press ENTER to exit test tone
setup.
If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Note
1 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see Audio DRC on page 133.
2 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see Switching audio channels
on page 96.
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
/TUNE
+
ENTER
/TUNE
123
456
78
0
++
––
9
Other connections
06
30
En
Chapter 6
Other connections
Important
When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch power off and
disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power
cord to the wall socket.
Connecting auxiliary components
This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to
connect external components, such as your MD or CD
recorder.
Connect the DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) or DIGITAL
(OPTICAL) jack on the rear panel to the optical
output of an external playback component.
These include digital components such as an MD player,
digital satellite, or a game system.
Connecting an analog audio component
You can use the ANALOG input jacks to connect an
analog audio component, such as a tape player. See
Using this system for TV audio on page 11 for connection
details (this explains connecting the audio output from
your TV, but any analog audio component can be
connected).
Listening to an external audio source
You can connect both analog and digital external audio
sources to this system. Digital audio sources include
digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. Analog
sources include your TV. See also Using this system for
TV audio on page 11 and Connecting auxiliary
components above.
1 If the system isn’t already on, press RECEIVER
to switch on.
Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite
receiver, etc.) is switched on.
2 Use the AUDIO IN button to select an audio input
source.
3 If necessary, start playback of the external
source.
Connecting external antennas
For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinyl-
insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors.
Leave the loop antenna connected.
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
SPEAKERS
DVD/DVR 2
(OPTICAL)
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND
DVD/DVR 1
(COAXIAL)
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANTENNA
FM
UNBAL
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
75
ANALOG
DIGITAL
(OPTICAL)
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
CONTROL IN
MCACC
SETUP MIC
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
CD recorder, etc.
DIGITAL OUT
(OPTICAL)
RECORDER
HDD/DVD
PAU SE PLAY STOP
REC
TOP MENU
STOP REC
INFOHELP
FM/AM
SOUND
RETRIEVER
AUDIO IN
RECEIVER


ì
DVD/DVR2
ANALOG
DIGITAL
DVD/DVR1
Outdoor antenna
5 m to 6 m
Indoor
antenna
(vinyl-coated
wire)
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
Other connections
06
31
En
For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook
up an external FM antenna.
Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma
display
If you have a Pioneer plasma display
1
, you can use an
SR+ cable
2
to connect it to this unit and take advantage
of various convenient features, such as controlling this
unit via the plasma display’s remote sensor, automatic
video input switching of the plasma display, display unit
messages appearing on the plasma display screen, and
automatic volume muting on the plasma display.
Important
With an SR+ cable connected, the remote must now
be pointed towards your plasma display rather than
the display unit of the receiver subwoofer in order to
control the receiver subwoofer.
Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the
CONTROL IN jack of this unit (through a media
receiver, if applicable) to the CONTROL OUT jack of
your plasma display.
3
Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need to
make a few settings in the unit—see SR+ Setup for
Pioneer plasma displays below.
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays
Make the following settings if you have connected a
Pioneer plasma display to this unit using an SR+ cable.
1 Press SR+.
2 Use the / buttons to choose SETUP, then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to choose the setting you
want to adjust.
The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle
through the display. See below for a full list and
description of each.
4 Use the / buttons to adjust the setting.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to make other settings.
6 When you’re done, press ENTER to leave the SR+
setup menu.
Note
1 This system is compatible with all Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.
2 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support di-
vision for more information on obtaining an SR+ cable.
ANTENNA
PAL connector
SYSTEM CONNECTOR
SPEAKERS
DVD/DVR 2
(OPTICAL)
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND
DVD/DVR 1
(COAXIAL)
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANTENNA
FM
UNBAL
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
75
ANALOG
DIGITAL
(OPTICAL)
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
CONTROL IN
MCACC
SETUP MIC
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
OUT
CONTROL
Pioneer plasma display
Media receiver
3 You won’t be able to use the remote sensor of this unit with the CONTROL IN jack of this unit connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of your
plasma display. You can use the remote sensor of the plasma display (even in standby) as long as the power isn’t switched off.
SET UP
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
ENTER
/ /
TIMER REC REC MODE
123
456
78
0
++
––
9
Other connections
06
32
En
Automatic plasma display volume muting
When Volume Control is switched on, the volume of the
plasma display is automatically muted when the receiver
subwoofer is switched on, or the receiver subwoofer’s
input function is changed to one that you would want to
hear the sound from the receiver subwoofer rather than
the plasma display (DVD, for example).
VOL.C ON – When this unit is switched on, or the
input function is changed, the volume on the plasma
display is muted so only sound from this unit is
heard.
VOL.C OFF – This unit does not control the volume of
the plasma display.
Automatic plasma display input switching
In order that the plasma display can switch automatically
to the correct input when you switch the input function of
the receiver subwoofer, you need to tell it how your
system is connected.
For example, if you connected your DVD recorder to the
DV1 input on the receiver subwoofer, and to input 2 on
your plasma display, select the DV1 PDP2 setting here so
that when you switch the input function of the receiver
subwoofer to DV1 to watch your DVD recorder, the
plasma display will automatically switch to input 2.
For each receiver subwoofer input function (DV1 (DVD/
DVR1), DV2 (DVD/DVR2), DIG (DIGITAL), ANA
(ANALOG)) you can select:
NONE – does not switch the plasma display input
PDP1 to PDP5 – switches the plasma display input to
one of the numbered inputs (1 to 5)
TVTN – switches the plasma display to its built-in
TV tuner
Note
The number of video inputs available will depend on
the plasma display you’ve connected.
The PDP5 input may be called ‘PC Input’ (or similar)
on your plasma display.
The SR+ setting remains in effect even in standby.
The SR+ setting does not affect the FM/AM tuner
function.
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma
display
1 Press SR+ on the remote.
2 Use / to select SR+ ON then press ENTER.
The SR+ setting is maintained even after switching
the receiver subwoofer into standby then back on.
Automatic muting and input switching will be
effective when the receiver subwoofer is switched on.
If you disconnect the SR+ cable or switch the plasma
display off while SR+ is on, the SR+ ON setting
remains.
To switch to SR+ OFF, follow steps 1 and 2, selecting
SR+ OFF.
Note
You can control this unit with the plasma display’s
remote sensor even in standby, but you can’t control
this unit with either this unit’s remote sensor or the
plasma display’s remote sensor when the plasma
display is switched off (AC off) and the SR+ cable is
connected to the CONTROL IN jack of this unit.
Additional information
07
33
En
Chapter 7
Additional information
Important
To access green functions on the remote, move the
slider switch from MAIN to SUB.
Dimming the display
You can choose to dim the display if you find it too bright.
1
1 Press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to select DIMMER then
press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select LIGHT or DARK
then press ENTER.
DTS CD setting
If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change
this setting to hear the decoded signal.
1 Switch the system into standby.
2 Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select CD TYPE from the
menu, then press ENTER.
4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then
press ENTER.
Select from:
NORMAL – Use for playback of regular audio CDs.
Some DTS-encoded CDs will output noise when played.
DTS-CD – Use for playback of DTS-encoded CDs, but
note that the beginning of regular CD tracks may be
skipped.
Setting the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after
a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying
about it.
2
1 Press the SLEEP button to select an option.
Choose between the following options:
SLP ON – Switches off after about an hour
SLP OFF – Cancels the sleep timer
After selecting SLP ON, you can press SLEEP again to
check how much time is left. Each line indicates
approximately 12 minutes (remaining):
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the
factory default.
1Switch the system on.
2 Press and hold SURROUND then press the
STANDBY/ON button on the display unit.
The next time you switch on, all the system settings
should be reset.
Note
1 The display dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting.
SETUP
MCACC
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
TEST TONE VIDEO IN
SR
+
ONE TOUCH COPY
MENU
ENTER
/ /
TIMER REC REC MODE
123
456
78
0
++
––
9
2 The display dims when the sleep timer is set. The DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer.
SURROUND
ADVANCED SOUND TV/DVD
SLEEP
INPUT
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
RDS DISP
AXD7442
VOLUME DISPLAY
CLEAR
JUKE BOX
0
++
––
SLP --- --
Additional information
07
34
En
Installation and maintenance
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come,
so please bear in mind the following points when
choosing a location:
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or
stereo rack
.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity,
including near radiators and other heat-generating
appliances.
Place on a window sill or other place where the system will
be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in
your stereo system that becomes hot in use.
Use near a television or monitor as you may experience
interference—especially if the television uses an indoor
antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be
exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this may
prevent proper cooling of the system unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough
to support all four of the system unit’s feet.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from
the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the DVR-545HX-S DVD recorder, try setting the recorder’s
audio-related settings back to their defaults—see The Initial Setup menu on page 129.
General
Problem Remedy
The power does not turn on, or
switches off suddenly (an error
message may be displayed at
startup).
• Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on.
• Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the
system to shut off automatically.
• Check that the speakers are connected correctly.
• Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer.
• Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model.
• Try reducing the volume level.
• If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your
dealer for servicing.
No sound is output when an
input function is selected.
• If you’re playing from the DVD recorder, make sure that the digital coaxial cable is
connected properly. Also make sure that the DVD recorder’s Digital Out and DTS Out
settings are set to On, and that the MPEG Out setting is set to MPEG PCM.
• If you’re using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see
Connecting auxiliary components on page 30).
• Turn up the volume.
Additional information
07
35
En
Tuner
Error Messages
No sound from surround or
center speakers.
• Refer to Channel level setting on page 28 to check the speaker levels.
• Check that you haven’t selected the AUTO, STEREO, or VIRTUAL mode (see Listening in
surround sound on page 23).
• Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up on page 8).
• If you’re playing from the DVD recorder, check that the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to
Dolby Digital.
• If the source is 96 kHz, this will be played in stereo. If you want to play it in surround
sound, set the DVD recorder’s 96 kHz PCM Out setting to 96 kHz 48 kHz.
• With television broadcasts, this unit will only output to two channels. To hear a broadcast
in multichannel sound, select DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic), MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II
Movie) or MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) in surround mode (on page 23) or an
Advanced surround mode (on page 24).
Can’t operate using the remote
control.
• Replace the batteries (Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 15).
• Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor (Using the remote control on page 14).
• Remove any obstacles or operate from another position.
• Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light.
• For operating the DVD recorder, make sure that the control cable and coaxial cable are
connected. (page 8)
• If the receiver subwoofer is connected to a Pioneer plasma display with an SR+ cable,
check that the plasma display is switched on. Point the remote control at the plasma
display in order to operate the receiver subwoofer.
• Check that nothing is mistakenly plugged into the CONTROL IN jack.
Problem Remedy
Problem Remedy
Considerable noise in radio
broadcasts.
• Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up on page 8) and adjust the direction and
position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM
antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 30).
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You
may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 30).
• Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away.
Auto tuning does not pick up
some stations.
• The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal.
For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna.
Message Description
2CH ONLY • An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the
current source is a multichannel source.
96K • An operation is prohibited because the source is 96 kHz digital.
EXIT • Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity.
NOISY • Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully.
ERR MIC • An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is
not connected properly.
ERR SP • An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are
not connected properly.
EEP ERROR • Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
NO SPTYP • Try switching the unit off then on again. If the error still appears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer.
Additional information
07
36
En
Glossary
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Specifications
SX-SW505HX Audio Multi-channel Receiver
Subwoofer
Amplifier section
RMS Power Output:
Front, Center, Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W per channel
(1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 )
Subwoofer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 W (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 )
FM tuner section
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 , unbalanced
•AM tuner section
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
Subwoofer section
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bass-reflex floor type
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz
Maximum Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 W
•Miscellaneous
Power requirements . . . . . . AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 W
Dimensions . . . . .200 mm (W) x 375 mm (H) x 437 mm (D)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 kg
Accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) . . . . . . . . . 2
Coaxial cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
These operating instructions
Dolby Digital A multi-channel audio encoding system
developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables far
more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM
encoding.
Dolby
Pro Logic II
A matrix decoding technology developed by
Dolby Laboratories that expands any two-channel
source audio, such as CDs and TV broadcasts, to
a five-channel playback (left/center/right/left
surround/right surround), resulting in a surround
experience.
DTS A multi-channel audio encoding system
developed by Digital Theater Systems that
enables far more audio to be stored on a disc
than PCM encoding.
Additional information
07
37
En
S-ST606 Speaker system
(Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speaker x1)
Front/surround speakers
Enclosure .............................Closed-box floorstanding type
(magnetically shielded)
System..............................................................2-way system
Speakers:
Woofer ..................................................7.7 cm cone type x2
Tweeter ...........................................2.6 cm semi-dome type
Nominal impedance........................................................ 4
Frequency range ......................................... 70 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power................................................100 W
Dimensions.........260 mm (W) x 1096.5 mm (H) x 260 mm (D)
Weight .......................................................................... 4.2 kg
Center speaker
Enclosure ................................... Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System.................................................7.7 cm 1-way system
Speakers.................................................... 7.7 cm cone type
Nominal impedance........................................................ 4
Frequency range ......................................... 75 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power................................................100 W
Dimensions ............270 mm (W) x 96 mm (H) x 90 mm (D)
Weight ........................................................................ 0.78 kg
Accessories
Speaker cables..................................................................... 5
Non-skid pads (small) ......................................................... 4
Non-skid pads (large) .......................................................... 4
Non-skid pads (large) ........................................................ 16
Speaker stand bases ........................................................... 4
Screws (for bases) ............................................................. 12
Note
Specifications and design subject to possible
modification without notice, due to improvements.
38
En
DVR-545HX-S
DVD Recorder
Section Three
39
En
Contents
01 Before you start
Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 41
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Symbols used in this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
02 Connecting up
Rear panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Common Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connecting a TV antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Easy connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Using other types of audio/video output. . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . . 49
Connecting an external decoder box (1). . . . . . . . . . . 50
Connecting an external decoder box (2). . . . . . . . . . . 50
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
03 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
04 Getting started
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For users receiving digital broadcast services . . . . . . 58
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system. . . . . . . . . . . . 59
05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic
program guide
The GUIDE Plus+ system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . 73
06 Using the digital electronic program
guide
The Digital EPG system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Using the Digital EPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting timer programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Other useful EPG functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
07 Recording
About DVD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . . 82
Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Pause Live TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play)
. . . 85
Recording from an external component. . . . . . . . . . . 85
Playing your recordings on other DVD players. . . . . . 86
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
08 Playback
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Basic playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of
a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Playing in slow motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Displaying disc information on-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 97
09 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DV video setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
10 Editing
Editing options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
The Disc Navigator screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
11 Copying and backup
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Using disc backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Section Three
40
En
12 Using the Jukebox
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Copying files from a USB device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Playing music from the Jukebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
13 The PhotoViewer
Locating JPEG picture files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Importing files from a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . 121
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
14 The Disc Setup menu
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Initialize settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
15 The Video Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 127
16 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Selecting other languages for language options. . . 139
Using Software Update (Digital tuner) . . . . . . . . . . 139
17 Additional information
Setting up the remote to control your TV. . . . . . . . . 140
TV Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
On-screen displays and recorder displays. . . . . . . . 148
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Before you start
01
41
En
Chapter 1
Before you start
Disc / content format playback
compatibility
Compatible media
DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 6x
DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x,
ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x
DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x
DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x
DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x,
ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x
DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x
DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD
writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt
the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs
between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we
recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’
limited compatibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs.
1
Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
2
Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
3
Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
DVD/HDD Recording and playback
compatibility
This recorder can play and record all the currently popular
DVD disc types, as well as providing HDD functionality.
The table below shows some specific compatibility
differences between the different disc types.
Model Playable Recordable
DVR-7000
Yes
1,2,3
No
DVR-3100 / DVR-5100H
Yes
1
No
HDD DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
Marks used in this manual
*1 *1
*
2 *13, 16
Logos
Re-recordable / Erasable
ì *3 *3 ì ì *3 ì *14 ì
Editing of recorded programs
ì ì ì *4 ì ì *4 ì *4 ì *4 ì
Recording of Copy-once protected
material
ì ì *12 ì *12 ì *12
Playback in other players/recorders
n/a *5 ì *6 *7 ì *6 ì
*6, 15
ì *8 ì *9
Chase play
ì
16:9 and 4:3 program recording
ì ì ì ì
Bilingual broadcast recording of
both audio channels
ì
*10, 11
ì *11 ì *11 ì *11
HDD
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
Before you start
01
42
En
Notes to table
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 124)
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 124)
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R(VR) playback
*6
Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units) (page 86)
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW(VR) playback
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off
(page 135)
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and
Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs
from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited.
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor
increase the number of recordable titles left.
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be
recorded (page 124). In this case, initialization will take about 1 hour.
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL (Double-Layer)
discs contain two recordable layers on a single side,
giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a
conventional single-layer disc. This unit can record to
both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs.
If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or
DVD+R DL discs recorded on this unit on other DVD
recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note that
some DVD recorders/players may not play even
finalized DL discs.)
Please read the information provided on the disc
packaging carefully before purchasing DVD-R DL/
DVD+R DL discs:
Confirm the disc version: Use ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x DVD-R
discs.
Confirm the recording speed: DVD-R should be
compatible with 2x or 4x recording; DVD+R with 2.4x
to 8x recording.
This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or
DVD+R DL disc:
Correct operation has been confirmed for DVD-R DL
discs (ver. 3.0 / 2x, 4x) produced by the following
manufacturers: Mitsubishi Kagaku Media, Verbatim
(as of March 2005).
About DualDisc playback
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which
contains DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other
side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio
material.
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with
the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play.
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc,
the opposite side to that being played will be scratched.
Scratched discs may not be playable.
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-
Audio content will not play.
For more detailed information on the DualDisc
specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or
disc retailer.
Other disc compatibility
In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a
wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable
discs will generally feature one of the following logos on
the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some
disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may be in
an unplayable format—see below for further
compatibility information.
CD-R/-RW compatibility
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD,
ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or
DivX files.
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and
Video CD/Super VCD)
Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only
Compressed audio compatibility
Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB.
Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),
Windows Media Audio (WMA)
Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended)
Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
VBR WMA playback: No
Video CD
Audio CD CD-R
CD-RW
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
Before you start
01
43
En
WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec
8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be
playable but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)
DRM (Digital Rights Management)
1
file playback: No
File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do
not use for other file types)
File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these
limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these
limits are playable)
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility
The Windows Media
®
logo printed on the box indicates
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by
using Windows Media
®
Player for Windows
®
XP,
Windows Media
®
Player 9 or Windows Media
®
Player 10
series.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
DivX video compatibility
DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the
DivX
®
video codec from DivX, Inc. This recorder can play
DivX video files burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs.
Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual
DivX video files are called "Titles." When naming files/
titles on a CD-R/-RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind
that by default they will be played in alphabetical order.
Official DivX
®
Certified product.
Plays all versions of DivX
®
video (including DivX
®
6)
with standard playback of DivX
®
media files.
File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that
all files with the .avi extension are recognized as
MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video
files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder.
File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
DivX
®
VOD content
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on
this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with
your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by
generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you
submit to your provider.
Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed
number of times. When you load a disc containing this
type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays
is shown on-screen and you then have the option of
playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining
plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains
expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has
zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is
displayed.
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of
plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and
play the content as often as you like, and no message will
be displayed.
Important
DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital
Rights Management) system. This restricts playback
of content to specific, registered devices.
If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not
authorized for this recorder, the message
Authorization Error is displayed and the content
will not play.
Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the
recorder on page 153) will not cause you to lose your
registration code.
Note
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of
compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see
the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software.
DivX
Before you start
01
44
En
JPEG file compatibility
Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*
still image files
*File format used by digital still cameras
Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels
Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels
Progressive JPEG compatible: No
File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used
for the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use
for other file types)
File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders
/ 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application
software used to create the disc. In these particular
instances, check with the software publisher for more
detailed information.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are
not compatible with this recorder.
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes
for additional compatibility information.
Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
"Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DTS
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
DVB
The Digital Video Broadcasting Project, or DVB for short,
is a set of open standards for digital broadcasting,
covering terrestrial, cable and satellite broadcasts.
Based around the MPEG-2 coding system, these open
standards ensure that compliant systems are able to
work together, independent of manufacturer.
DVB is extremely flexible, being able to deliver virtually
any kind of digital content to the home, including High
Definition and Standard Definition TV, broadband
multimedia content and interactive services.
DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project.
About the internal hard disk drive
The internal hard disk drive is a fragile piece of
equipment. Depending on the conditions under which it
is used, or through careless use, it is possible that the
recorded contents will be damaged or lost completely, or
that normal playback and recording will not be possible.
Please understand that in the event of repair or
replacement of the HDD or related components, all your
HDD recordings will be lost.
Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to
protect against possible HDD failure.
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store
recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up
your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to
protect against accidental loss.
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept
responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from
HDD failure.
Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes
during EPG download when the display shows EPG).
Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
While the recorder is switched on (including during
EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not
unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity
off from the breaker switch.
Do not move the recorder immediately after switching
it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow
the steps below:
1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the
display, wait at least two minutes.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
Before you start
01
45
En
The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of
recorded material will be possible. In this case it will
be necessary to replace the HDD unit.
Optimizing HDD performance
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see
Optimize HDD on page 125).
Symbols used in this manual
The following icons are provided to help you quickly
identify which instructions you need for which kind of
disc.
HDD
Any type of DVD disc (recordable or
playback only), finalized or not.
Commercially produced DVD, finalized
Video mode DVD-R/-RW.
Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized)
VR mode DVD-R/-RW
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
Audio CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA or MP3 files
DivX files
All of the above
HDD
DVD
DVD-Video
DVD (Video)
DVD (VR)
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
DivX
A L L
Connecting up
02
46
En
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Rear panel connections
1 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video,
S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 132 for how
to set this up.
2 AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB.
See AV2/L1 In on page 132 for how to set this up.
3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or
monitor with a component video input.
4 CONTROL IN
Connect to the CONTROL OUT terminal of the receiver
subwoofer.
5 G-LINK™
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable
GUIDE Plus+™ to control an external satellite receiver, etc.
6 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN)
jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT
jack for connection to your TV.
7 ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN/OUT
Connect your DTV antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL)
IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA
(DIGITAL) OUT jack for connection to your TV.
8 COMMON INTERFACE slot
Slot for CA module and smart card used to decode
scrambled D.TV channels. See Common Interface on
page 47.
9 HDMI OUT
HDMI output for high quality digital audio and video.
10 AC IN – Power inlet
11 OUTPUT
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
12 INPUT 3
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for
connection to a VCR or other source component.
13 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL
Connect to the DVD/DVR1 coaxial jack on the receiver
subwoofer.
Front panel connections
On the front panel a flip-down cover hides more
connections.
14 USB port (Type B)
USB port for connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer.
15 USB port (Type A)
USB port for connecting a digital camera, USB memory
or other USB device.
16 DV IN
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a
DV camcorder.
17 INPUT 2
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and
S-video), especially suitable for camcorders, game
consoles, portable audio, etc.
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
P
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
Y
1 2
10 11 12 13
3 4 5
76 8 9
S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R
AUDIO
INPUT 2
DV IN
USB
1714 1615
Connecting up
02
47
En
Common Interface
To receive scrambled D.TV channels you will need a CA
module and smart card provided by your service provider.
Different CA modules support different encryption
systems. This recorder is designed to work with modules
that support the DVB standard. Contact your service
provider to obtain the right kind of CA module.
Note that neither CA modules nor smart cards are supplied
or sold by Pioneer.
Inserting a CA module
The Common Interface card slot is located on the rear
panel of the recorder.
1 Push the latch to release the slot cover on the
rear of the recorder.
2 Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as
it will go.
The Common Interface card slot accepts Type I and Type II
PC Cards (PCMCIA cards).
Connecting a TV antenna
This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for
terrestrial digital and terrestrial analog TV broadcasts.
If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts now, use the
longer of the supplied RF antenna cables to connect the
output of your antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN
connector. Next use the short supplied RF antenna cable
and connect it between the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT
and ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connectors. Lastly, connect the
recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector.
If your area is not yet served with terrestrial digital
services, connect your antenna’s output to the
ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector using one of the
supplied RF antenna cables. Next, connect the recorder
to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector.
We strongly recommend using an outdoor antenna for
better broadcast picture quality.
If, however, you want to use an indoor antenna, use one
with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V, 30 mA and set Aerial
Power to On in the Initial Setup menu (see page 130).
Slot cover latch
COMMON INTERFACE
TV
Antenna
wall outlet
HDMI
OU
T
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
P
R
Y
TV
Antenna
wall outlet
HDMI
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
P
R
Y
Connecting up
02
48
En
Easy connections
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows
you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs.
Other types of connections are explained starting on the
following page.
Important
These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If
your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, if
you want to use the supplied audio/video cable, see
Using the S-video or component video output
on
page 48.
The
AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector can output ordinary
(composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog
audio. The
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
connector
accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as well
as stereo analog audio. See
AV1 Out
on page 132 and
AV2/L1 In
on page 132 for how to set them up.
Before making or changing any rear panel
connections, make sure that all components are
switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.
See
Connecting a TV antenna
on page 47 for details.
If you want to incorporate a VCR in your setup, connect
it
before
the recorder (i.e., between the antenna wall
outlet and the antenna input on the recorder).
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector on this recorder to the
SCART AV connector on your TV.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT
1/DECODER)
AV connector to a SCART AV connector on
your VCR.
Tip
This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 129).
Using other types of audio/video
output
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your
TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output
jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output.
Using the S-video or component video output
1 Connect the S-video or component video output
to a similar input on your TV.
For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not
supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an S-
video input on your TV.
For a component video connection, use a component
video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV.
See also Component Video Out on page 132 for how to set
up the component video output for use with a progressive
scan-compatible TV.
2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the
yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
for correct stereo sound.
TV
To recorder's
antenna input
VCR
Antenna/cable T
wall outlet
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
Y
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
1
2
2
3
TV
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
P
R
Y
S-VIDEO
INPUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
1
2
Connecting up
02
49
En
Connecting to a cable box or satellite
receiver
If you have a cable box or satellite receiver with a built-in
decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown
on the following page.
1
If you are using a separate
decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following
the instructions on the next page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box,
satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.
Change channels and set timer recordings on the
external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system
(via the G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).
Important
Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’
your VCR, satellite receiver or other component.
Always connect each component directly to your TV
or AV amplifier/receiver.
When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a
timer recording from an external receiver, make sure
that the external receiver is switched on.
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 47 for more on RF
antenna connections, including from this recorder to
your TV.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your cable box/satellite receiver.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
4 Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™
jack.
This enables you to control the tuner in the external
receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system.
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so
that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite receiver will
pick up the control signals (see diagram).
See the manual that came with your cable/satellite
receiver if you’re not sure where the IR receiver is on the
front panel. Alternatively, experiment with the remote
control, operating it from very close range until you find
the place where the receiver responds.
Tip
This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 129).
Note
1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections.
TV
Satellite dish/
antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
Cable/Satellite
receiver
To recorder's
antenna input
HDMI
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
P
R
Y
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
1
2
3
4
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIG
AUDIO
C
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
UTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AUDIO
P
B
P
R
Y
G-LINK cable
Connecting up
02
50
En
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your
satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on
this page. See the previous page for how to connect the
G-LINK™ cable.
Important
•Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.
Information from the decoder (for example, relating
to pay TV services), is only viewable when this
recorder is off (in standby).
For timer recording to work properly on this recorder,
the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be
switched on during recording.
It is not possible to watch one TV program and record
another using this setup.
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.
3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV connector on this recorder.
4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector to your TV.
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and
your TV as shown on this page.
1
Using the setup on this page you can:
Record scrambled channels received using the
recorder’s built-in analog TV tuner.
Important
Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR,
satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each
component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 47 for details.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
Decoder
H
D
MI
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
P
R
Y
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
1
4
2
3
Note
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 132).
• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 131).
TV
Decoder
H
D
MI OUT
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL
G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
P
R
Y
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
2
3
Connecting up
02
51
En
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped
1
monitor or
display
2
, you can connect it to this recorder using an
HDMI cable (not supplied).
The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.
1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT
connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on
an HDMI-compatible monitor.
The arrow on the cable connector body should be
face down for correct alignment with the connector
on the recorder.
When connected to an HDMI component or HDCP-
compatible DVI component, the HDMI indicator lights.
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however
settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output
(only available when an HDMI device is connected) on
page 137 for more information. Note that the HDMI
settings remain in effect until you change them, or
connect a new HDMI component.
Important
An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-
equipped components compatible with both DVI and
High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP).
If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will
need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP
connection, however, does not support audio.
Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz, 44.1
kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit 2-channel
linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and
MPEG audio bitstream.
If your connected component is only compatible with
Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS
audio is not output).
If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma display,
please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to
the supplied manual for more on this).
About HDMI
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports
both video and audio on a single digital connection for
use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes,
and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide
the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content
Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital
content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant
displays.
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncom-
pressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5 gigabits per
second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several
cables and connectors), and communication between
the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
licensing LLC.
Note
1 This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) version 1.2a and HDCP version 1.1. Depending
on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i) and PAL
(720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced.
HDMI-compatible display
H
DM
I
O
U
T
ANTENNA
IN
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(DIGITAL)
IN
OUT
VIDEO
L
R
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
S-VIDEO
OUTPUT
INPUT3
IN
CONTROL G-LINK
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
AC IN
COMMON INTERFACE
AUDIO
P
B
P
R
Y
HDMI
IN
Connecting up
02
52
En
Connecting other AV sources
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder
1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR
or camcorder.
You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
Alternatively, you can use the AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input
and output with just one SCART cable.
2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or
camcorder.
You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
The front panel connections make convenient
connections for a camcorder input.
Connecting a DV camcorder
Using the front panel DV IN jack, it is possible to connect
a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/-RW recorder
and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/-RW discs to
DVD-R/-RW.
Important
This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-
VHS video decks.
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
jack of your DV camcorder/video deck to the
front panel DV IN jack of this recorder.
Analog camcorder
VCR
(Rear panel)
(Front panel)
HDD/DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
STANDBY/ON
S-VIDEO
COPYHDMIPLTVDivXD.TVA.TV
VIDEO L(MONO) R
AUDIO
INPUT 2
ONE TOUCH
COPY
CH
ì REC
+
A.TV/D.TVHELP
INPUT
SELECT
PAUSE
LIVE TV
DV IN
USB
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
1 2
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
DV camcorder
HDD/DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
STANDBY/ON
S-VIDEO
COPYHDMIPLTVDivXD.TVA.TV
VIDEO L(MONO) R
AUDIO
INPUT 2
ONE TOUCH
COPY
CH
ì REC
+
A.TV/D.TVHELP
INPUT
SELECT
PAUSE
LIVE TV
DV IN
USB
DV
OUT
DV
IN
Connecting up
02
53
En
Connecting a USB device
Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can
connect USB devices such as digital cameras and
printers. Please also see the instructions that came with
the device you want to connect before using.
Important
Some USB devices may not work with this recorder.
Devices may not work reliably if connected to this
recorder via a USB hub.
JPEG file storage devices
Digital still camera
Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
USB memory
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-
compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this
recorder may not recognize it.
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to
transfer up to about 4000 files.
WMA/MP3 file storage devices
Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
USB memory
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-
compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this
recorder may not recognize it.
Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used,
the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To
read another card, remove all the cards and insert the
card to be read again.
Using a USB printer
Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.
Plugging in
After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.
Use the supplied power cable to connect this
recorder to a power outlet.
Digital Camera
HDD/DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
STANDBY/ON
S-VIDEO
COPYHDMIPLTVDivXD.TVA.TV
VIDEO L(MONO) R
AUDIO
INPUT 2
ONE TOUCH
COPY
CH
ì REC
+
A.TV/D.TVHELP
INPUT
SELECT
PAUSE
LIVE TV
DV IN
USB
USB
USB
Type B
PictBridge-compatible
Printer
USB
USB
Type A
Controls and displays
03
54
En
Chapter 3
Controls and displays
Front panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
2 Disc tray
3 A.TV indicator
Lights when analog TV is selected.
D.TV indicator
Lights when digital TV is selected.
DivX indicator
Lights during DivX playback. (Copy indicator lights
during copying.)
PLTV indicator
Lights during recording started using the Pause Live
TV feature.
HDMI indicator
Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI
(HDCP) compatible component.
COPY
Light during copying.
4 OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
5 HDD and DVD indicators
Indicator lights blue when the hard disk (HDD) is selected;
orange when the DVD drive is selected.
6 HDD/DVD
Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and
playback.
7 Front panel display
See Display on page 55 for details.
8
Press to start or restart playback.
9
Press to stop playback.
10 CH +/–
Use to change channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.
11
(STOP REC)
Press to stop recording.
12 ì REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in 30 minute blocks.
13 Front panel inputs
See Front panel connections on page 46 for more
information on these.
14 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.
15 A.TV / D.TV
Switches between analog TV antenna input and digital TV
antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV indicators show
which is selected.
16 INPUT SELECT
Press to change the input to use for recording.
17 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 110)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
18 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 83)
Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with
playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.
HDD/DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
STANDBY/ON
S-VIDEO
COPYHDMIPLTVDivXD. TVA.TV
VIDEO L(MONO) R
AUDIO
INPUT 2
ONE TOUCH
COPY
CH
ì REC
+
A.TV/D.TVHELP
INPUT
SELECT
PAUSE
LIVE TV
DV IN
USB
8
2
1
9
4 5 76
11
1210
14 15 16 17 18
3
13
Controls and displays
03
55
En
Display
1
Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.
2
Lights when copying.
3 ì
Lights during recording; blinks when recording is
paused.
4 (page 70)
Lights when a timer recording has been set.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to record to the HDD but the HDD is not
recordable.)
NTSC
Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC.
(page 133)
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
are recorded.
(page 132)
Lights when the component video output is set to
progressive scan (except in some cases when a
component is connected using HDMI).
VPS / PDC (page 70)
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.
5 Recording quality indicators (page 82)
XP
Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best
quality).
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to SP
(standard play).
LP / SLP
Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long
play) or SLP (super-long play).
EP / SEP
Lights when the recording mode is set to EP
(extended play) or SEP (super-extended play).
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to MN
(manual recording level) mode.
6 Character display
7R / RW
Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is
loaded.
8 PL (page 101)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the
recorder is in Play List mode.
2 3 (page 138)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is
displayed, the remote control mode is 1).
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is
loaded.
P
R
L
8 7
2 43 5
6
1
Getting started
04
56
En
Chapter 4
Getting started
Switching on and setting up
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you
can make several basic settings using the Setup
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output.
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting
to use the recorder.
1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
recorder.
2 Switch on the recorder.
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 129).
If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check the manual
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)
3 Choose a language (then press ENTER).
4 Start the Setup Navigator.
If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press
to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup
Navigator.
5 Select an Aerial Power setting
1
for the
built-in digital tuner.
On: power is always supplied to the connected aerial,
whether the recorder is on or in standby.
Auto
: power is only supplied when this recorder is on.
Off: power is never supplied to the aerial.
6 Select ‘Auto Scan’ to start scanning for
D.TV channels.
Select Do not set if you want to skip D.TV channel
setup (because they have already been set up, for
example), then skip to step 8 below.
7 Select your country.
The recorder starts scanning for new channels. After the
scan is complete the recorder will let you know how many
new channels were found.
The country setting will apply to both the digital and
analog TV tuners.
The clock will also be set automatically here if D.TV
channels are found.
If no new channels were found a message appears
asking if you want to scan again. Check the aerial
connection before selecting Yes. (If you select No,
skip to step 8 below.)
8 Select the analog TV (A.TV) Auto Channel
Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or ‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do
not set’.
Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup
(because they have already been set up, for example).
You can only use the Download from TV feature if
this recorder is connected to your TV using a fully-
wired 21-pin SCART cable via the AV1(RGB)-TV
connector, and if your TV supports this function
(check your TV’s instruction manual for more
details).
RECORDER
ENTER
Initial Setup
Basic
Digital Tuner
Analogue Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
HELP
EPG
Pause Live TV
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Language
Basic
ENTER
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
Start
Cancel
Start
Complete this setup before you
start using your recorder.
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
Note
1 If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting (the highlight jumps back to Off), check that the antenna is properly connected and
that it is not shorted, then try making the setting again.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
Auto Channel Setting
English
Download from TV
Do not Set
Auto Scan
Getting started
04
57
En
Select your country.
Auto-tuning channels
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the
channel presets.
Downloading channels from your TV
Use the Download from TV option to download all the
channels that your TV is tuned to.
9 Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting,
or ‘Manual’ to set the clock manually.
If the clock was already set from a D.TV channel in step
6
,
this step is skipped.
Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
you see that it’s set, select Next to proceed.
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN/EXIT to go back to the previous screen and
select Manual.
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
signals, you can set the clock manually.
Use the / buttons to set your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
Press then use the / buttons to select ‘On’
or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER.
Select On if you are currently using summer time.
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
Use the / buttons to change the value in the
highlighted field.
Use the / buttons to move from one field to
another.
You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in
the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN/EXIT.
10 Select the EPG (Electronic Program Guide)
type to use.
GUIDE Plus+: Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG
(see also Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system on
page 59 and Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic
program guide on page 62).
Digital EPG: Use the SI EPG (program information
broadcast together with digital channels).
If no channels were found when scanning for digital
TV channels then this screen does not appear and
the EPG is set according to the country set in step 7
above.
ENTER
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
Country Selection
Country
Austria
Tuning
32/99
Cancel
Downloading Pr 5
32/99
Cancel
ENTER
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
Clock Setting
Auto
Manual
Auto
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
Auto Clock Setting
Date
Time
Clock Set CH
–– / –– / ––––
–– : ––
Pr 1
Start
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
Auto Clock Setting
Date
Time
Clock Set CH
SUN 01 / 01 / 2006
11 : 20
Pr 1
Start
Next
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
Manual Clock Setting
Time Zone
Summer Time
Off
Austria
Vienna
1/2
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
Manual Clock Setting
Time Zone
Summer Time
On
Austria
Vienna
1/2
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
Manual Clock Setting
Date
Time
Time Zone
Summer Time
On
Austria
Vienna
01 / /01
00 : 00
2006SUN
2/2
ENTER
Getting started
04
58
En
11 Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or
‘Standard (4:3)’.
12 Select whether or not your TV is
compatible with progressive scan video.
Note that progressive scan video is only output
through the AV1(RGB)-TV connector and the
component video outputs.
13 Press to continue after reading the HDD
caution.
14 Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the Setup
Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
If there are blank channels with no station, you can
set these to skip using the manual channel setting.
See Manual CH Setting on page 131.
For users receiving digital broadcast
services
This unit can set its internal clock automatically from
digital broadcasts. However, depending on the
broadcaster, the clock information received may not be
accurate.
Use the following procedure (while the recorder is not
recording) to set the clock manually.
1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select 'Initial Setup' > 'Basic' > 'Clock
Setting'.
3 Highlight the time setting.
4 Press ENTER to display the manual clock
setting screen.
5 Set the correct time.
Return to automatic clock setting
To return to the automatic clock setting, follow the
instructions for 'Replace Channels' (page 130).
ENTER
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p Navigator
p Navigator
TV Screen Size
Wide (16:9)
Standard (4:3)
ENTER
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
Progressive
Compatible
Not Compatible
Don't Know
Not Compatible
ENTER
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
P
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
In the event of HDD failure, recordings may
be lost or normal playback/recording may
not be possible.
As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD
failure, we recommend to use the HDD only
as temporary storage media.
Please copy recordings you want to keep
to recordable DVD.
Press ENTER to continue.
ENTER
k
Setting
t
Line System
e
r Save
p
Navigator
p
Navigator
Setup is complete!
Enjoy using your DVD recorder!
Finish Setup
Go Back
Finish Setup
HOME MENU
ENTER
ENTER
Getting started
04
59
En
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system
This section is only applicable if you chose to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system as the EPG type in step 10 of the
Setup Navigator above.
The GUIDE Plus+™ system is a free, interactive on-
screen television programming guide. The system offers
program listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more.
For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is
important that you set the language and country
correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have
performed a scan for available channels, as these are all
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things
are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see
Switching on and setting up on page 56).
TV listings information is received via ‘host channels’. In
order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once
this is done, all future updates are automatic.
1 Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu.
The language and country settings are already set to
whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator.
2 Highlight ‘Postal Code’.
3 Enter your postal code.
The system uses your postal code to identify which TV
listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it
is important that you enter it correctly.
GUIDE
ENTER
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED
TEST TONE
SR+/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE
/ST /ST+
123
456
78
0
9
ENTER
Getting started
04
60
En
4 If you are using an external receiver (such as a
satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable,
complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.
See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on
page 49 for more on using the supplied G-LINK cable.
Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press
ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use
External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in
2 and 3 if you need to.)
After pressing ENTER:
Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or
Satellite).
Select your provider (if applicable).
Select the brand of your external receiver.
Identify which input your external receiver is
connected to.
After completing these steps the recorder will try and
communicate with your external receiver and change the
channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was
successfully changed, select Yes to confirm.
If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE
Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your
external receiver. If none of the codes changes the
channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the
host channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and
leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby;
it will wake up automatically and download new codes
from the host channel. The next day, try this setup
process again:
Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
Press to highlight the Menu bar, then use to
reach the Setup area and select Setup.
Continue setting up from the start of this step again.
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the G-
LINK controller, please call customer support and report
the brand and model of your external receiver.
See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on
page 73.
5 Identify the host channel for your country.
The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus+
system is distributed throughout Europe by selected
broadcasters called host channels. It is important that
the host (analog) channel for your country is correctly
identified in order to receive listings information (EPG
download).
Follow A, B or C below depending on your setup:
A If you are not using an external receiver, this
recorder will automatically scan all channels for the
host channel:
Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave
it switched on).
B If you are using an external receiver, you need to
identify the host channel from the table below:
Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host
channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in
standby overnight.
C If you use both an external receiver and this
recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for
setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is
unsuccessful try the external receiver method.
Country/
Region
Host channels Comments
Austria Eurosport
Belgium RTL-TVI
Music Factory (TMF)
TMF will be switched off in the
near future.
France Canal+ Analog only
Germany Eurosport
Italy MTV Analog only
Netherlands Music Factory
(TMF), Eurosport
TMF will be switched off in the
near future.
Spain Tele 5 Analog only
Switzerland Eurosport
UK ITV, Eurosport ITV is analog only. Use
Eurosport if you are a SKY
subscriber and you no longer
have an analog terrestrial
antenna.
Getting started
04
61
En
About EPG download
EPG data can only be received when the recorder is
in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore,
please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an
external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is
downloading.
If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see
the above table) then you won’t be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the
postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, set the postal code again.)
If digital broadcasts start in your area, please set the
EPG Type Select setting in the Initial Setup menu to
Digital EPG.
Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you
live, you can still set ShowView timer recordings and
manual recordings — see Setting a manual recording
on page 70.
The front panel display shows EPG when receiving
data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG
download, the download is canceled.
EPG data may be received several times a day. All
updates are automatic.
When downloading EPG data, the recorder may
sound as though it is on. This is normal.
Checking the downloaded data the
following day
1 Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV
listings information. Use the / buttons to review the
list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that
there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the
Editor screen:
Press repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted.
Press until Editor is highlighted. The main area of
the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that
are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that
are OFF are hidden. Use the /// buttons to
move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as
necessary.
For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+
system will need to know how it is received (the
source) and on which program number. The source
may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or an
external receiver. The program number is the number
on which the channel can be found on its receiving
device/source. The entry in the Editor screen must
match this number for correct recording of that
channel.
The above is especially important for the ‘host
channel’. Please make sure that the host channel is
always switched ON.
2 Change the program numbers as you like.
Changing the program numbers allows you to decide the
order in which the channels change when stepping
through them sequentially. You can do this to group
certain channels together, for example.
3 When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button
(Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen.
You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE
Plus+ system in the following chapter.
GUIDE
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED
TEST TONE
SR+/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE
/ST /ST+
123
456
78
0
9
D. TV 001
D. TV 002
D. TV 003
D. TV 004
D. TV 005
Ext. Rec. 1 007
D. TV 006
D. TV 014
D. TV 017
BBC1
Name On/Off Source Prog. No.
On
BBC2 On
ITV On
CH4 On
CH5 On
BBC3 On
ITV2 On
E4 Off
UKGOL On
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
62
En
Chapter 5
Using the GUIDE Plus+
electronic
program guide
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select
setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup
menu) is set to GUIDE Plus+.
The GUIDE Plus+ system
The GUIDE Plus+™ system* is a free, interactive on-
screen television programming guide.
1
The system
provides program listings for all major channels, one-
touch recording, searching by genre, recommendations
according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+
system is a convenient way to find out what's on right
now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre.
The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to
automatically set your viewing and recording selections
quickly and easily.
In order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up
the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 59
before
proceeding.
* GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+,
G-LINK are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2)
manufactured under license from and (3) subject of
various international patents and patent applications
owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International,
Inc. and/or its related affiliates.
Legal Notice
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system
All the various features and areas are colour-coded for
ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of
some setup screens) have the following common
elements:
1 Video window – Allows you to continue watching
the current program while using the GUIDE Plus+
system.
2 Information panels – Display program promotions
or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system.
3 Action bar – Colour-coded Action buttons change
function depending on the area.
4
Information box – Shows short program descriptions
or help menus.
5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for the next
seven days by channel and time.
Note
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 129).
1
2
3
4
5
6
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
63
En
GUIDE Plus+ navigation
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons
you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system.
One-Button-Record
The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you
can highlight a program title, including from the Grid,
after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV
area.
The program name, date, channel, recording start and
end times are all set automatically when you set a timer
recording using One-Button-Record.
If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before
the recording is due to start (see Editing a scheduled
recording on page 67).
1 Highlight a program title.
2 Press the RED Action button (Record).
The program is now set for recording. When the program
is due to start, the recorder will switch to the correct
channel and start recording
1
.
You can also use the ì REC button to set the
recording.
You can review the shows you have set to record in
the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on
page 67).
Key
What it does
ì REC
Press to set or cancel One Button
Recording.
GUIDE
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+
screen (also use to exit).
///
Use to navigate screens (highlight an item).
RED, GREEN,
YELLOW, BLUE
Action buttons that change
functionality depending on the Area.
MENU
Press to jump directly to the Menu bar.
TIMER REC
Press to go directly to the Schedule area.
INFO
Press to display extended information
for the current program.
ENTER Press to confirm a selection or to leave
the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
Number buttons Use for numeric entry.
PREV /
NEXT
Press to select the previous/next page of
information (in the grid, for example).
 /  Press to select the previous/next day.
Note
1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the program broad-
cast schedules.
ENTER
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
64
En
Lock / Unlock video window
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel
you were watching remains visible in the video window.
The date stamp above the window lets you know the
channel, date and time.
The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as
indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video
window. When locked, the video window always shows
the channel you were previously watching as you move
up and down through the listings grid.
If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as
you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that
channel is shown in the video window.
1 Highlight a channel logo.
Channel logos are displayed to the left of program titles.
2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock).
The padlock icon above the video window becomes
unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your
current TV viewing session.
If you want to lock the video window again, follow the
same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as
Lock.
Channel mosaic screen
You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid
Area, Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic
of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button.
Select the channel icon you want using the cursor
buttons, then press
ENTER to return to the previous
screen on that channel.
Areas
The GUIDE Plus+™ system consists of seven Areas. All
Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.
Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area.
Displays TV listings information for the next seven
days by time and channel.
Search – Search for TV programs by category (e.g.,
Sport), subcategory (e.g., Football) or keyword.
My TV – Set up a profile and receive
recommendations according to your preferences.
Schedule – Show all scheduled recordings.
Info – Area for additional information, such as
weather (not available in all regions).
Editor – Change channel settings.
Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+™ system.
The Grid Area
The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE
Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when
you press GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next
seven days, starting with the current day.
When you highlight a program in the Grid, you can see
information about it in the Information Box, including
title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there
is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there
is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button
to see it.
In some countries, you can also see a rating for a particular
program (mostly movies). These ratings are provided by
local partners, such as TV magazines.
From the Grid Area you can:
View and scroll through program listings
Read program synopsis
Tune to a program that’s currently showing
1
Set a program to record
Lock or unlock the video window.
Access Information panels.
Browsing the Grid
Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:
/// (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid
PREV/ NEXT – Previous / next page
/ – Previous / next day
BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in
the Grid.
ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE
Plus+ system and start watching the program.
ENTER
Note
1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel.
This is normal.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
65
En
The Search Area
From the Search Area you can:
Search by category
Search by subcategory
Search by keyword
Read program synopsis
Tune to a program that’s currently showing
Set a program to record
Access Information panels.
Searching
You can search for programs by category, subcategory or
by keyword (My Choice). Categories for searching
include Movies (purple), Sport (green), Children (blue)
and Others (teal). In some countries there is a further
subcategory available called ‘Tip of the Day’. These are
programs recommended by a local partner, such as a TV
magazine.
1 Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar.
2 Select a category and a subcategory.
If you choose All as the subcategory, all programs in
the category you selected will show up in the search
results.
3 Start the search.
The search results are shown sorted by time and date.
If no search results are displayed, it means there are
no programs for the current day that match your
search criteria.
Using My Choice keywords for a search
In addition to the standard categories, you can also set
your own keywords.
1 Access My Choice.
2 Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword.
3 Enter a keyword to appear in the menu.
When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to
exit and continue.
4 Start the keyword search.
You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
When you have set more than two keywords, an All
subcategory automatically appears which allows you
to search for all your keywords.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
66
En
My TV Area
The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile.
You can define a profile by channels, themes and/or
keywords. As soon as a personal profile has been set, the
GUIDE Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings
for the next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV
Area, a list of programs matching your profile appears.
From the My TV Area you can:
Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword.
Edit and delete profiles.
Read program synopsis
Tune to a program that’s currently showing
Set a program to record
Access Information panels.
Setting up a profile
You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16
channels, four categories and 16 keywords.
1 Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.
2 Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.
Channels is now highlighted.
3 To add a channel to your profile, press the
YELLOW Action button.
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and
press
ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.
4 To add a theme to your profile, highlight
‘Themes’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
Select a theme from the Search Area categories and
press
ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four
categories.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
67
En
5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight
‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and
continue.
6 Press
ENTER to activate your profile.
You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5.
You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and
GREEN Action buttons.
The Schedule Area
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and
delete scheduled (timer) recordings.
From the Schedule Area you can:
Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording.
Set, edit or delete a ShowView recording.
Set, edit or delete a manual recording.
Editing a scheduled recording
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or
delete it if you no longer require it.
1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
If you only want to edit the recording quality,
frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip
to step 6 below.
2 Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).
3 Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the
recording date, start time, end time and channel.
Use the / buttons or the number buttons to edit.
Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the
RED Action button to go back.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
68
En
4 Enter a name for the scheduled recording.
Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard.
After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action
button to continue.
5 Highlight the right recording tile.
6 Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change
the recording quality.
Select from AUTO
1
, XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or MN (if
manual recording is set to On).
7 Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to
change the recording frequency.
Select from the various options for one-time, daily and
weekly recordings.
8 Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to
select the recording destination.
Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace
Recording)
2
.
Auto Replace Recording is only available as an
option with regular daily or weekly recordings.
Note
1 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.
2• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 135) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Re-
covery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
69
En
9 Press to access the extended recording options:
If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use
the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one.
Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra
time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or
VPS/PDC
1
(V–P)).
Press to display the standard recording options
again.
Deleting a scheduled recording
1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
2 Press the RED Action button (Delete).
The scheduled event is deleted.
Setting a ShowView™ recording
1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
2 Press the RED Action button (ShowView).
3 Use the number buttons to enter a ShowView
programming number.
If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE
Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel
number. Follow the on-screen display to do this.
4 Press
ENTER to confirm.
Note
1• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO.
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
70
En
Setting a manual recording
1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
2 Press the GREEN Action button (Manual).
3 Use the number and /// buttons to enter
the recording date, then press the GREEN Action
button (Next).
4 In the same way, enter the recording start time,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
5 Enter the recording end time in the same way,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel
number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next)
to confirm.
Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button
(Mosaic) and use the /// buttons to select a
channel from the mosaic, followed by
ENTER.
About timer recording
Using the timer recording features you can program up
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer
recording programs can be set to record just once, every
day, or every week.
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if
recording to the HDD).
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to
automatically replace the previous timer recording with
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the
previous recording made on that timer program will be
replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have
watched it yet or not.
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see Optimized Rec on page 135 for more on this).
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the program to the HDD for you.
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video Programming
System) and PDC (Program Delivery Control) systems
used by many analog TV stations to ensure that a timer
recording catches the whole program even when the
program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer
programs can be set with VPS/PDC on.
D.TV 001
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
71
En
Important
•A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32
timer programs waiting to be recorded.
Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
Timer recording will start when the operation
preventing timer recording has finished.
The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel
display when the timer is active. If the indicator is
blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording)
there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that
the HDD is not recordable).
Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use
some functions.
The maximum length for timer recordings made to
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title
(HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12
hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there
will be a break in the recording of a few seconds
between titles.
VPS/PDC works only with analog stations; it does not
work with digital TV stations.
VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.
The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download
program information. During these times, VPS/PDC
may not work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you set a
timer recording for these times.
Extending a timer recording in progress
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast
program overruns, for example.
Canceling or extending the timer
1 Press and hold for three seconds during a
timer recording.
Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears
from the front panel display indicating that the timer has
been canceled.
2 Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30
minute blocks.
Stopping a timer recording
1 Press during a timer recording.
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.
Preventing use of the recorder before a timer
recording (child lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote control
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.
2[Front panel] Press and hold for three seconds
to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons
are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly
displayed again.
To unlock the recorder, press and hold STOP on
the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for
three seconds until the display shows UNLOCK.
Frequently Asked Questions
Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start
recording!
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not
locked (see Lock Disc on page 124), and that there are
fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why
not?
You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set.
What happens when two or more timer programs
overlap?
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start
time has priority. However, the recorder will start
recording the program with the later start time after
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have
the same times (but different channels, for example),
the program set most recently takes priority.
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
REC
ì
REC
ì
STOP REC
ENTER
RECORDER
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
72
En
The Info Area
This area is reserved for additional information such as
news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and
varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in
all countries/regions.)
The Editor Area
The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage
your channels. Any changes you make here will affect
what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is
mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to
make any manual changes as necessary.
You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become
available in your area, or if you change from cable to
satellite, say, or move house.
From the Editor Area you can:
Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel
on/off).
Select a channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1,
Ext. Rec. 2, etc.).
Enter a channel program number.
Switching a channel on/off
You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the
Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor
Area.
1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you
want to switch on or off.
3 Press the RED Action button to switch the
channel on or off.
Changing the source and program number
1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel
you want to make a change to.
3 Press the RED Action button to change the
channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter
a program number.
Each press of the RED Action button changes the
channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a
program number, use the number buttons to enter a
program number then press
ENTER (When set to A.TV or
D.TV, make sure that the program number matches the
preset number of this recorder for what you want to
record).
D. TV 001
D. TV 002
D. TV 003
D. TV 004
D. TV 005
Ext. Rec. 1 007
D. TV 006
D. TV 014
D. TV 017
BBC1
Name On/Off Source Prog. No.
On
BBC2 On
ITV On
CH4 On
CH5 On
BBC3 On
ITV2 On
E4 Off
UKGOL On
D. TV 001
D. TV 002
D. TV 003
D. TV 004
D. TV 005
Ext. Rec. 1 007
D. TV 006
D. TV 014
D. TV 017
BBC1
Name On/Off Source
Prog. No.
On
BBC2 On
ITV On
CH4 On
CH5 On
BBC3 On
ITV2 On
E4 Off
UKGOL On
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
73
En
The Setup Area
The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+
system for your particular region, TV reception conditions,
and so on.
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup
1 Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.
2 Highlight the part you want to change.
You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code
1
and the External Receiver settings.
3 Press
ENTER to confirm.
Manual Host Channel setup
The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your
Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby
for the first time. See the table on page 60 for a list of all
the European Host Channels.
If you know your Host Channel details (source and
program number) or if the automatic identification did
not provide the expected result, you can identify your
Host Channel manually. Select Host Channel Setup in
the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV.
Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external
receiver) and enter the respective program number (e.g.,
if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your Host
Channel, enter 9 as the program number). When you next
switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE Plus+
system will complete the Host Channel setup.
You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back
to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that
resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data.
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
troubleshooting
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list
please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at:
www.europe.guideplus.com
FAQ
When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not
get any of the attempts to work, what should I do?
A: There could be several reasons why your external
receiver could not be controlled.
– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that
the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK
connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in
front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR
receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a
cable box or satellite receiver on page 49.
– The code that is listed under your brand could be
wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under
satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and
choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or
terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE
Plus+ system can change channels on your external
receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process,
choosing different reception and external receiver
combinations until you have tried all the codes for
your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE
Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on
how to receive new codes overnight.
– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly
data downloads frequently include new codes for
controlling external receivers. Please tune your
external receiver to your local host channel and leave
Note
1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours.
Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen.
Basic Setup
Host Channel Setup
GUIDE Plus+ System Information
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
74
En
it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The
next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+
setup again to see if your external receiver can now
be controlled.
– The external receiver that you use is currently not
supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on
overnight, and doing the Reception and External
Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please
call Customer Support to report your brand and
model.
My external receiver was successfully setup. However I
have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has to
change to a channel with a 3-digit program number in
the external receiver's preset, it does not work. It looks
like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only send two digits.
With the number of channels increasing, the number
of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use
only 2 digits, newer boxes require up to 4. It is
possible that you selected an older code for your
brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area,
select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your
brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen
question about whether the receiver has changed to
a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has sent
a different code). Try all the different codes until your
GUIDE Plus+ system can control your external
receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to
receive new codes overnight.
•I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or
analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with
external receiver. What should I do to receive data for
the GUIDE Plus+ system?
You can try to receive your host channel through your
new reception method. If you have problems to
receive data we recommend that you keep your
analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive
data this way. It is important that you identify your
host channel correctly in the Editor Area.
After I performed the initial set-up I found that the line-
up for all the channels received via the external set top
box is incorrect. How do I correct this?
You can change the line-up in the editor according to
your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the
channels that you would like to change. Change the
source and preset number according to your
preferences.
•I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have
a blank EPG what is going wrong?
There are several possibilities:
– Connections are wrong. See Connecting up on
page 46 to double check everything.
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed
incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the
GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 59).
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has
not been connected for enough time to receive the TV
listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.
– For external receiver users only: The connections
and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not
tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of
host channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE
Plus+™ system on page 59) and leave the recorder
in standby and the external receiver on overnight
tuned to the correct host channel.
– You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+
system is not yet available. Check the list of countries
to see if you are in a region that is supported.
•I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action
button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong
channel.
If the channel to be recorded is received via the
external receiver first make sure that the external
receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor
Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is
correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the
source and program number of the channel that you
wanted to record. Change the source and preset
numbers if incorrect.
If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner
(the A.TV or D.TV setting), make sure that the
program number is the same as the preset number
set on this recorder. If they are different, go to the
Editor Area and change the program number to
match the recorder’s preset number.
The TV listings information doesn’t update.
The latest TV listings information is automatically
downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only
happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder
is left on, it will not download. When not using the
recorder, please switch it into standby.
Data downloads can take several hours. The front
panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you
switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the
download will be canceled.
The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area,
but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a
while the front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop
this from happening?
If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your
area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™
system on page 59). When the GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, please set the postal code again.
The automatic Host Channel search failed or the
GUIDE Plus+ system identified the wrong Host
Channel for my region.
You can identify your Host Channel manually. See
Manual Host Channel setup on page 73 for how to do
this.
Using the digital electronic program guide
06
75
En
Chapter 6
Using the digital electronic program
guide
This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select
setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup
menu) is set to Digital EPG.
The Digital EPG system
The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled digital TV
programs and detailed information about individual
programs. It also allows you easily to select and tune to a
particular program.
1
The Digital EPG screen consists of Program Information,
Channel List and General Program List. This section
describes information displayed in the schedule and
information windows.
Note that the recorder’s clock must be set to the correct
time and date to ensure all relevant EPG information is
displayed.
General Program List
1 Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled
forward or backward
2 Time schedule
3 Channel list
4 Highlights the currently selected channel
5 Indicates the program set for recording
6 Appears when other programs (often short ones)
have been scheduled for the same period
7 Program title
8 Time dividers
The general program list may show sections whose
bottom right corners have been folded. This indicates
that other programs have been scheduled for that
period. To view the title of such a program and related
information, highlight a folded section, and then
press /.
Program information
1 Channel number
2 Station name
3 Program title
4 Appear when other programs have been scheduled
for the same period
5 Program schedule
6 Program genre
Using the Digital EPG
Using the Digital EPG you can check the schedule of
digital TV programs, view information about desired
programs, and/or select programs.
1 Press to display the Digital EPG screen.
The EPG screen updates automatically if the EPG data is
acquired successfully. If not, the Digital EPG screen
shows a blank image.
Note
1 EPG information is only viewable for D.TV programs that provide EPG information.
D007
D007
GUIDE
Using the digital electronic program guide
06
76
En
2 Select a TV program.
Press CHANNEL +/– to skip to the next or previous
channel list page.
Information about the selected program appears in
the information window.
1
To watch a program currently on air, select the
program (then press ENTER).
You can check information about programs
scheduled up to 1 week ahead, depending on
conditions.
Depending on conditions, it may take some time to
acquire EPG data.
3 Press to view more information about the
selected program.
Detailed information appears in the schedule window.
If the screen contains further information, More ... is
displayed.
To quit the display of detailed information, press
INFO again (or RETURN/EXIT).
4 Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.
Setting timer programs
Using the Digital EPG, it’s easy to set digital TV programs
for recording.
1 Press to display the Digital EPG screen.
2 Select a program.
Select a program currently on-air: press ENTER to
close the Digital EPG screen watch the channel
immediately, or press RED to set the program for
recording immediately.
Select a program not yet started then press ENTER or
RED to set the program for recording.
3 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.
A red clock icon appears for the program.
4 Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.
Note
1 The general program list does not show programs that have already finished.
ENTER
D007
INFO
************
14:0513:40-
*************
**************************
More...
D007
GUIDE
GUIDE
ENTER
D007
ENTER
D007
GUIDE
Using the digital electronic program guide
06
77
En
Other useful EPG functions
EPG Jump
1 Press GREEN when the Digital EPG screen
(Program List, Detailed information or Search Result)
is displayed.
2 In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within
one week) to jump to.
3 In the ‘Time’ field select a time of the day
(0:00 to 23:00) to jump to.
4 Select ‘Jump’.
The Program List for the specified day and time is displayed.
EPG Search
1 Press YELLOW when the EPG screen (Program
List, Detailed information or Search Result) is
displayed.
2 In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within
one week) to search in.
3 In the ‘Time’ field select the time of day
(0:00 to 23:00) to search in.
4 In the ‘Genre’ field, select the genre to
search for.
You can search for multiple genres by pressing ENTER
after each genre.
5 Select ‘OK’.
6 Select ‘Search’.
The results of your search are displayed.
ENTER
Time
Date
14:00
Mon.13.Sep
CancelJump
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
Time
Date
Genre
0/16
12:00
Select
Sun.12.Sep
CancelSearch
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
Recording
07
78
En
Chapter 7
Recording
About DVD recording
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R,
DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL media.
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video
mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages,
and it depends on what you want to do with the recording
which mode you choose.
If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way,
VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying,
and changing the way the video is presented.
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but
it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard
DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs
1
).
Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all
recording on that disc will be in that mode.
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode recording.
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording.
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.
Important
The table below shows the maximum number of titles
recordable per disc and the maximum number of
chapters per title:
*1
A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.
*2
A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.
This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized Video
mode and DVD+R discs recorded on another
recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on another
recorder are playable on this recorder but are not
recordable.
The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc.
If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the
total number of recordable titles remaining may not
increase.
Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 138.
Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can
affect playback and/or recording performance.
Please take proper care of your discs.
Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
See also Disc / content format playback compatibility
on page 41 for detailed disc compatibility
information.
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the
same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however,
please note the following points:
When the recorder switches from the first layer to the
second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode)
disc, a new title is automatically started on the new
layer.
Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video
mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when
the layer is switched, recording will stop.
Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+R DL disc.
You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or
finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc that has been
recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD
recorder.
Note
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for
VR mode compatibility information.
Disc type/rec. format
Max. titles
(per disc)
Max. chapters
(per title)
DVD-R/-RW
Video mode
99 99
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
VR mode
99
999
*1
DVD+R/+RW 49
99
*2
Recording
07
79
En
About HDD recording
Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible;
you have the full choice of recording quality options,
including manual mode, and of course you can record,
erase and re-record as many times as you like.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
store many hours of video on it, even using the higher
quality recording modes.
Important
The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that
can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99
respectively. No more recording is possible on the
HDD after the maximum number of titles has been
reached.
The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is 12 hours.
It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
that the Input Line System setting (page 138)
matches the TV line system of the source you’re
recording.
HDD Video mode compatibility
When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in
one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD
Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 135).
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from
HDD to Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW is
possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set
which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup
menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 133).
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off,
high-speed copying isn’t possible. However, both
channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you
can switch the audio on playback.
Recorded audio
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two
channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can
be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible).
When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high quality,
uncompressed Linear PCM format.
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
to Video mode DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD
with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or
on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting
(page 133) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to
record before recording starts. In other cases, both
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and
you can switch on playback.
Restrictions on video recording
You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder.
Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and
some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material is
encountered during a recording, recording will pause
automatically and an error message will be displayed on-
screen.
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded to HDD,
CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/-RW (see below)
, or
DVD-RAM.
When recording a TV broadcast or through an external
input, you can display copy control information on
screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on
page 97).
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed
for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programs.
CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible
DVD-R (ver. 2.0 / 8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or
higher) discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or
on the HDD.
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
Recording equipment and copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must
be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home
and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
Recording
07
80
En
Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners
Switching between A.TV and D.TV tuners
Press to switch between D.TV (digital)
and A.TV (analog).
Changing channels
There are a number of ways to select analog and digital
TV channels.
1
Note that you can’t change the TV channel
during playback, recording or during recording standby.
CHANNEL +/– buttons
Number buttons
For example, to select channel 4 (digital channel
D004), press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34 (digital
channel D034), press 3, 4, ENTER.
2
CH +/– buttons on the front panel.
For D.TV channels only, you can also use the Channel
List—see below.
Tip
When changing terrestrial digital broadcast
channels, channels with a low signal strength may
result in a black screen being displayed.
For other channels, it may take a short while for the
channel picture to appear, and/or for the channel
number to appear.
In both of the above cases, some improvement may
be possible by adjusting the antenna.
Using the D.TV Channel List
When in D.TV mode, you can call up the on-screen
Channel List anytime by pressing ENTER. Use the /
buttons to select a channel, then press ENTER to switch
to that channel.
1
Displaying a channel banner
A channel banner shows program titles, start and end
times of the current program and other channel
information. The information is updated every minute.
Press to display the channel banner for the
current channel.
Use the / buttons to display the channel banner
for other channels. To switch to the displayed
banner’s channel, press ENTER.
The channel banner displays the Subtitles ( ) and
MHEG ( ) icon if that channel supports the MHEG
application (see Using the MHEG application below).
3
To see more detailed channel information, press
INFO again.
4
Use the / buttons to display information about
previous and following programs. Use the /
buttons to see information about other channels.
If there is still more information to be displayed,
More ... is displayed; press the BLUE button to see
the extra information.
To hide the channel banner, press RETURN/EXIT.
Changing D.TV audio languages
Press to display the current audio
language. Press repeatedly to change it to other
available languages.
Changing D.TV subtitle languages
Press to display the current subtitle
language. Press repeatedly to change it to other
available languages.
Note
1• If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.
• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for 3 minutes.
2 Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99; digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999.
+
A.TV/D.T
V
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
+
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED
TEST TONE
SR+/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE
/ST /ST+
123
456
78
0
9
D001
D002
D003
D004
************
************
******
************
D005
D006
****
******
3 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster, some icons may occasionally be present or absent in error.
4 Not all channels supply more detailed information.
INFO
Wed.30.Apr 12:46
Now
D001
************
Next
********************
*************
12:00
12:30
11:30
12:00
-
-
Now
************************
More...
12:0011:30-
+
AUDIO
MAIN SUB
+
MAIN SUB
SUBTITLE
Recording
07
81
En
Using the MHEG application
(UK only)
Some stations bring you programs with the MHEG
(Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert Group) application
encoded, letting you experience D.TV interactively.
1
The channel banner displays an icon ( ) to indicate that
the MHEG application can be run.
Press to start the MHEG application.
2
You can also use any of the colour buttons.
Press TEXT to quit the MHEG application.
Changing A.TV audio channels
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or
external input signal.
Press to change the audio type.
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on
page 133) is set to NICAM and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.
If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also
select the language.
You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
bilingual broadcast.
When watching a recording made from an external
input with Bilingual recording selected (see External
Audio on page 133), you can switch the audio
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).
Note
When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode,
or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a
bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide
which language you want to record before recording
by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see
Bilingual Recording on page 133).
Switching between TV and DVD
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
mode’).
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.
Switch between TV mode and DVD mode.
Note
1 If you start recording while the MHEG application is running, the MHEG application screen will also be recorded. To avoid this, quit the
application first, then start recording. It is not possible to start the MHEG application while recording is in progress.
2 This function is not available when subtitle display is active.
+
TEXT
MAIN SUB
+
AUDIO
MAIN SUB
NICAM
Regular
NICAM A NICAM B
Regular
NICAM A+B
A (L) B (R)
A + B (L+R)
LR
L+R
TV/DVD
Recording
07
82
En
Setting the picture quality/recording
time
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set
the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard
settings available, which allow you to choose a balance
between picture quality and recording time.
When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual
Recording on page 135), a further option will be available
(MN1 to MN32 or LPCM, depending on what you set).
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the longest
recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to
MN3, the recording mode will automatically revert to
SLP.
Press repeatedly to select the recording
quality.
XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of
recording time on a DVD disc.
SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most
applications, gives about two hours of recording time
on a DVD.
LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but
doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four
hours.
EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives
about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but
gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but
gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
MN1 to MN32 / LPCM
1
– Manual / Linear PCM
(available only when manual recording is on)
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see On Screen Display on page 137) is Off then this
information is not displayed.)
Basic recording from the TV
Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the
channel to record, choosing whether to record to the
HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality.
1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording.
If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the
recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc).
If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video
mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before proceeding
(see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 87).
2 Press to switch between D.TV (digital)
and A.TV (analog).
3 Select a TV channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel number, or
channel name if it’s available:
While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
number buttons on the remote to select the channel
(For channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).
If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the CH +/–
buttons on the front panel to select the channel
number.
4 Set the picture quality/recording time.
See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 82 for detailed instructions.
5
If you’re recording from the A.TV tuner,
select the audio channel to record.
See Changing A.TV audio channels on page 81 for more
on this.
When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set
to LPCM, in which case you do need to select the
audio channel before recording.
Note
1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio chan-
nel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 133).
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
REC MODE
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
HDD/DVD
+
A.TV/D.T
V
MAIN SUB
CHANNEL
+
A.TV Channel preset
REC MODE
+
AUDIO
MAIN SUB
Recording
07
83
En
6 If you’re recording from the D.TV
tuner, select the audio language to record.
You may also be able to set which subtitle language
to record; use SUBTITLE to select.
7 Start recording.
If you want to set a recording end time, press the ì REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the
front panel display. When the recording ends, the
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other
operation is being performed.
To cancel the set recording time, press ì REC.
If you want to pause recording at any time
1
, press
PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording (If
recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a
new chapter is started after recording restarts).
8 Press to stop recording.
If you set the recording time in the previous step,
you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing
STOP REC.
Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
Tip
During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop
through function. During recording, press the front
panel CH + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop
through on), or CH – to switch to SCART NORM (loop
through off). Loop through is automatically reset to
off after recording has finished. Note that you can’t
switch loop through on if recording from the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) or AV1(RGB)-TV
connectors.
Pause Live TV
The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV
program you’re watching. When you’re ready to resume
watching, just press the PLAY button.
Setting up for Pause Live TV
You can use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-
compatible TV connected using a SCART cable (see TV
tuner setup for Pause Live TV below), or using this
recorder’s internal tuner (see Using the recorder’s
internal tuner for Pause Live TV below).
TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV
To use this feature with an external TV tuner, the recorder
must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable, and
the AV Link setting (page 138) should be set to This
Recorder Only.
2
See also Pause Live TV on page 129 for
more on this.
In order to use Pause Live TV, make the following
connections and settings.
Pause Live TV will not work as expected when
watching TV via an external component such as a
VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel
selected on the TV.
Important
Pause Live TV only works with the built-in A.TV
(analog) tuner. It does not work with the D.TV tuner or
the external inputs. Make sure the Auto Channel
Setting is set to Download from TV (see Auto
Channel Setting on page 131).
1 Connect this recorder to your TV with a SCART
cable.
2 Press HOME MENU.
3 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Analog Tuner’ > ‘Auto
Channel Setting’ > ‘Download from TV’.
If the Download from TV option appears grayed out,
check the connections to your TV and try again.
Depending on your TV, you might have to switch off
and unplug it for a few moments before plugging it
back in and switching on.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
1 Except during Chase Play.
+
AUDIO
MAIN SUB
REC
ì
STOP REC
2• Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you’re not sure.
• This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came with your TV if you’re unsure
about your TV’s compatibility with this feature.
HDD
Recording
07
84
En
Using the recorder’s internal tuner for Pause Live TV
If you haven’t connected to your TV using a SCART cable
(or your TV is not compatible with AV Link) you can use
the recorder’s internal tuner for the Pause Live TV.
1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Basic’ > ‘Pause Live TV’ >
‘Recorder’s Tuner’.
See Pause Live TV on page 129 to do this.
You can record the channel selected on the recorder.
Using Pause Live TV
1 Start recording the current TV channel.
Recording continues with playback paused.
Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording
to start.
2 Press to start playback.
You can also use the scan buttons (/), pause (
PAUSE) and stop ( STOP)—all without affecting the
recording.
3 Press to stop the recording.
The operation is slightly different depending on the
viewing source. See the Operation table below for details.
Tip
When the Pause Live TV setting (see page 129) is set
to TV’s Tuner, you can press PAUSE LIVE TV while
the recorder is in standby to switch on and
immediately start recording. When set to Recorder’s
Tuner, it is not possible to use the Pause Live TV
feature from standby.
After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV, it will take at least 10
seconds for the picture to change (during this time,
all controls except the power button are inoperative).
(Note that startup from standby is not possible if you
have selected Recorder’s Tuner in Pause Live TV on
page 129.)
Please note that you can’t record from another
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART
cable to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector
using the Pause Live TV feature.
Operation table
*1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording.
PAU SE
LIVE T
V
PLAY
STOP REC
Viewing source
TV/DVD
mode of DVR
DVR source
Pause Live TV
function button
Condition
TV built-in analog tuner
TV
Pause Live TV Preset channel of DVR and TV are matched after
downloading from TV
Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT matched
after downloading from TV. Record TV program
that you’re watching.
TV built-in digital tuner
TV
Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be shared by
DVR even after Download from TV. Record TV
program that you’re watching.
External input of TV
TV
Direct TV recording*1 Record TV program that you’re watching.
DVR built-in analog tuner
DVD
DVR built-in analog tuner
Pause Live TV
DVR built-in digital tuner
DVD
DVR built-in digital tuner
Pause Live TV
Recording
07
85
En
Simultaneous recording and playback
(Chase Play)
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in
progress from the start, without having to wait until the
recording has finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the
recording).
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress. You can watch anything else already on the
HDD (or on a DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using
the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on
page 91).
Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input.
Press during recording to start playback
from the beginning of the current recording
1
.
Press during recording to select another
title to play.
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.
To stop playback, press STOP (recording will
continue).
To stop recording, press
STOP REC (playback will
continue).
During recording or in timer recording standby, you
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 138). Also, during simultaneous recording
and playback, if the TV line system of the playback
track/title changes then playback will automatically
stop.
Recording from an external component
You can record from an external component, such as a
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s
external inputs.
1 Make sure that the component you want to record
from is connected properly to the DVD recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.
2 Press repeatedly to select one of the
external inputs to record from.
The current input is shown on-screen and in the front
panel display:
AV2/L1 – Input 1
2
L2 – Input 2 (front panel)
L3 – Input 3
Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio and
Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In
on page 133).
If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or
stretched), adjust on the source component or your
TV before recording.
To watch video coming in via the DV input (front
panel), select DV > DV Video Playback from the
Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on
page 98).
3 Set the recording quality.
See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 82 for detailed information.
4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording.
5 Press to start recording.
If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard,
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 79 for more details.
Note
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.
HDD
PLAY
DISC
NAVIGATOR
2 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 132).
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
VIDEO IN
REC MODE
HDD/DVD
REC
ì
Recording
07
86
En
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs
recorded in Video mode and DVD+R discs. A number of
players (including many Pioneer models) can also play
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not.
Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R discs,
although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD recorders may
be able to (finalization might be necessary). Check the
manual that came with the player to check what kinds of
discs it will play.
When you finalize a Video mode or DVD+R disc, a title
menu is created from which you can select titles when
you play the disc. There are a number of different styles
of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the
disc.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then
using the /// followed by ENTER to select titles
and start playback.
Finalizing a disc
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc so that it can
be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped
with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
1
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc
Name on page 124 before starting the steps below.
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need finalizing. However,
if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc,
then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD+RW,
you can still record and edit even after finalizing.
although the title menu will disappear if you do so.
Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu.
Important
Once you’ve finalized a Video mode or DVD+R disc,
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 125 for how to do
this.
•A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc
can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even
after finalizing.
Video mode DVD-R DL discs and DVD+R DL discs
must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/
players. Note however that some recorders/players
will not play even finalized dual-layer discs.
1 Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before
proceeding.
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
3
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ > ‘Next Screen’.
4 For Video mode and DVD+R/+RW discs
only, select a title menu style, then select ‘Yes’ to
start finalization or ‘No’ to cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD+R/+RW) is selected
on any DVD player.
Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR-
7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These
discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on
this recorder.
5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.
Note
1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional infor-
mation about the TV system settings on page 138 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW
HOME MENU
ENTER
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Next Screen
Start
Finalize
ENTER
Finalize
Recording
07
87
En
During finalization:
If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD+R/
+RW disc is going to take more than around four
minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around
four minutes before completion, the option to cancel
disappears.
You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R
disc.
How long finalization takes depends on the type of
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. Video mode
DVD-R/-RW and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to
20 minutes.
Initializing recordable DVD discs
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode
recording or VR mode recording.
1
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,
the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By
default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init. on page 135 if you want
to change the default to Video mode.
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of
the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode
recording, you must initialize it before recording anything
on the disc.
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in
order to erase the contents of the disc.
Important
Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc
will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there
is nothing on the disc that you want to keep!
You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in
a different format if it was originally initialized on an
older DVD recorder.
Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t re-
initialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video Mode’, ‘VR Mode’
or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’.
3 Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except
DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to 1 hour).
Note
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
HOME MENU
ENTER
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
VR Mode
Video Mode
Initialize DVD+RW
Start
Start
Start
Initialize
ENTER
Initializing Disc
1 min left
Pr 1
Playback
08
88
En
Chapter 8
Playback
Introduction
Most of the features described in this chapter make use
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor
buttons and ENTER. To go back one level from any
screen, use the RETURN/EXIT button.
Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of
every screen shows which buttons do what.
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/
DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of
some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded.
Many functions are not available when a Video CD is
playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc
Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using
the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on
page 92).
For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The
PhotoViewer on page 118.
Basic playback
This section shows you how to use your recorder for
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of
video from the HDD.
Important
Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means any
kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is
specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified.
Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and DVD+RW discs don’t
allow certain playback controls to operate at certain
points in the disc. This is not a malfunction.
1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback.
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below.
Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.
2 [Front panel] Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-sided
DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face
down).
If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read
the note on page 90.
3 Start playback.
If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
/// buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc
menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for
Video CD menus.
When playing video from the HDD, playback will
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
There may be a slight pause when playback switches
from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc.
See the following sections for more details on playing
specific kinds of discs.
4 Press to stop playback.
5 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
A L L
HDD/DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
PLAY
STOP
Playback
08
89
En
Playing DVD discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback controls when
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback
starts from the place last stopped.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same point
by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP again to
cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to
increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the front
panel CH +/– buttons.)
DVD+R/DVD+RW only: PREV may not
always skip to the previous title.
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a
chapter number then press ENTER to skip
directly to that chapter within the currently
playing title.
On some discs, you can also use the number
buttons to select numbered items in the disc
menu.
VR mode only: During playback, enter a title
number then press ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry
and start again.
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only: (Commercial
back/skip) Press to skip backward/forward
progressively up to a maximum of ten
minutes forward or three minutes back.
While paused, press and hold to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video
disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this
recorder will display the Disc Navigator.
Press MENU to display the disc menu.)
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-
Video disc menus; press ENTER to select
items.
Press to return to the previous level of a
DVD-Video disc menu.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
PREV NEXT
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED SOUND
CLEAR
TEST TONE
SR+/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE–
/ST– /ST+
123
456
78
0
9
ENTER
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
ENTER
/ /
MENU
TOP MENU
DISC
NAVIGATOR
ENTER
RETURN
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback
starts from the place last stopped. Playback
automatically stops after the end of a title is
reached.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to
increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the front
panel CH +/– buttons.)
During playback, enter a title number then
press ENTER to skip directly to that title.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
(Commercial back/skip)
Press to skip backward/forward progressively
up to a maximum of ten minutes forward or
three minutes back.
While paused, press and hold to start
slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
PREV NEXT
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED SOUND
CLEAR
TEST TONE
SR+/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE–
/ST– /ST+
123
456
78
0
9
ENTER
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
ENTER
/ /
Playback
08
90
En
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
audio CDs
1
, and WMA/MP3 files.
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Video CD/Super VCDs.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
can select what to watch.
2
Press to start playback.
Press to stop playback.
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
Except WMA: Press to start scanning. Press
again to increase the scanning speed.
(There are two scan speeds; the current
scan speed is shown on-screen.)
Press to skip to previous/next track (or folder
for WMA/MP3 disc). (During playback you
can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.)
During playback, enter a track number then
press ENTER to skip directly to that track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
Note
1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels
on page 96).
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
PREV NEXT
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED SOUND
CLEAR
TEST TONE
SR+/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE–
/ST– /ST+
123
456
78
0
9
ENTER
Press to start playback.
Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-
screen, playback starts from the place last
stopped.
Press to stop playback.
Video CD only: You can resume playback
from the same point by pressing PLAY.
(Press STOP again to cancel the resume
function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to
increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next track.
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to
display the previous/next page. (During
playback
you can also use the front panel CH
+/–
buttons.)
During playback, enter a track number then
press ENTER to skip directly to that track.
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
start again.
While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use
to select numbered menu items.
Video CD in non-PBC mode only:
Press to skip backward/forward progressively
up to a maximum of ten minutes forward or
three minutes back.
While paused, press and hold to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed (forward only).
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward only).
Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.
2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video
CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on
page 92).
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
PREV NEXT
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED SOUND
CLEAR
TEST TONE
SR+/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE–
/ST– /ST+
123
456
78
0
9
ENTER
CM
BACK
CM
SKIP
ENTER
/
RETURN
Playback
08
91
En
Playing DivX video files
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DivX video files.
Using the Disc Navigator to browse
the contents of a disc
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
and start playback.
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video
on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view information
on titles.
See also Editing on page 100 for more on editing
recordable discs.
1 Select the HDD or DVD.
2 Open the Disc Navigator.
You can also access the Disc Navigator from the
Home Menu.
3 Browse the list of titles.
Use the PREV/ NEXT buttons to display the
previous/next page of titles.
To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title
see Set Thumbnail on page 103.
For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a
thumbnail title digest. If it doesn’t display, set Set
Preview to Normal. See Set Preview on page 138.
4 Play the highlighted title.
You can also select Play from the command menu
options.
Press to start playback.
If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback
starts from the place last stopped. Playback
of titles (DivX files) proceeds in alphabetical
order.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when
paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to
increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next title. (During
playback you can also use the front panel
CH +/– buttons.)
While paused, press to advance one frame.
Press and hold to start slow motion playback
(press repeatedly to change the slow motion
play speed).
Press to display the playback audio type;
press repeatedly to change the playback
audio type.
Press to display subtitle information; press
repeatedly to change subtitles.
PLAY
STOP
PAUSE
PREV NEXT
/
+
AUDIO
MAIN SUB
+
MAIN SUB
SUBTITLE
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
HDD/DVD
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
Recent first
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
MENU
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
ENTER
ENTER
Playback
08
92
En
Changing the display style of the Disc
Navigator
You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in
various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by
recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose
whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the
same time.
1 Display the View Options panel.
2 Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or ‘Genre’,
then press ENTER to see the available view options.
Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view
Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first),
unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest
first)
Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre
3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to the new
display preferences.
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only
discs
1 Display the Home Menu.
2 Select ‘Disc Navigator’.
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/
MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which
takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
3 Select what you want to play.
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc
Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all
navigated in the same way.
The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX disc.
Navigate to the folder, or the track/title within a folder
that you want to play.
Playback starts after you press ENTER.
For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks and WMA/
MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the
playback area between CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX.
This can only be done while the disc is stopped.
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
2
3
7
4 Titles
Remain
NEW first
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
HDD
SP
MENU
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Sort order
Recent first
Genre
All Genres
Style
The View Options panel
ENTER
ENTER
DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD
WMA/MP3
DivX
HOME MENU
ENTER
ENTER
CD
WMA/MP3
Divx
Folder (01-03)
01.Rock
02.Pop
03.Dance
Track(001-004)
001.Intro
002.Escape
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
Disc Navigator
Playback
08
93
En
Scanning discs
(except WMA)
You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
backwards.
1
1 During playback, start reverse or forward
scanning.
The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
2 Press repeatedly to change the scanning
speed.
There are four scanning speeds available when playing
HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also
possible with HDD and DVD video.
2
There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc.
3 Resume normal playback.
Playing in slow motion
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in
either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX
titles can only be played forwards in slow motion.
There is no sound when playing in slow motion.
1 Pause playback.
2 Press and hold to start slow motion
reverse or forward play.
3 Press repeatedly to change the slow
motion speed.
The current playback speed is indicated on-screen.
4 Resume normal playback.
Frame advance/frame reverse
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc
3
or the
HDD frame-by-frame.
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only
use frame advance.
1 Pause playback.
2 Back up or advance one frame with each
press.
3 Resume normal playback.
The Play Mode menu
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search
functions, repeat and program play functions.
Select ‘Play Mode’ from the Home Menu.
You can also access the Play Mode menu by pressing
PLAY MODE.
To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or
PLAY MODE.
Note
1• No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs and DivX titles with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1 (Linear
PCM is output from the coaxial digital output, except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback). No sound is output when
using other scan speeds.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the coaxial digital output during
forward SCAN 1).
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
2 Reverse playback may not be smooth.
A L L
PLAY
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD
DivX
PAUSE
/ /
/ /
PLAY
3 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD
DivX
PAUSE
/ /
PLAY
A L L
HOME MENU
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Playback
08
94
En
Search Mode
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
specified point in a disc by time
1
or by title/chapter/
folder/track number.
1 Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode
menu, then choose a search option.
The available search options depend on the type of disc.
2
Enter a title/chapter/folder/track number
or a search time.
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes
into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and
30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0.
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,
press 6.
3 Start playback.
A-B Repeat
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
played over and over.
2
1 During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from
the Play Mode menu.
2 With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press at
the point you want the loop to start.
3 With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press at the
point you want the loop to end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and
plays the loop round and round.
When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from
the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be
in the same title.
To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B
Repeat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such
as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
Repeat play
There are various repeat play options, depending on the
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the
program list (see Program play below).
3
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu,
then choose a repeat play mode.
To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from
the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu
OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.
Note
1 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
2 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.
A L L
ENTER
SET UP
MCACC
ADVANCED
TEST TONE
SR+/TUNE+
ENTER
/TUNE
/ST /ST+
123
456
78
0
9
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Input Time
0.01.00
ENTER
DVD HDD CD Video CD
DivX
ENTER
3 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.
ENTER
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
ENTER
A L L
ENTER
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Repeat Disc
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
Playback
08
95
En
Program play
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
chapters
1
/folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.
1 Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode
menu, then ‘Input/Edit Program’.
The Input/Edit Program screen varies according to the
disc type. Below is the DVD input screen.
2 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for
the current step in the program list.
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/
track, the step number automatically moves down one.
To insert a step into the program list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
To delete a step from the program list, highlight the
step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.
3 Repeat step 2 to build up a program list.
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
folders/tracks.
4 Play the program list.
Program play remains active until you cancel program
play, erase the program list, eject the disc or switch off
the recorder.
Tip
To save your program list and exit the program edit
screen without starting playback, press HOME
MENU or PLAY MODE.
During program play, press NEXT to skip to the
next program step.
To repeat play the program list, select Program
Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see
Repeat play on page 94).
Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program
list.
From the Program menu you can also:
Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved
program list
Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but
does not erase the program list
Erase Program List – Erases the program list and
turns off program play
Displaying and switching subtitles
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle
language during playback.
2
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle
options.
Select/change the subtitle language.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR.
Note
1 When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on
the disc.
HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD
WMA/MP3
ENTER
Program
Step
01.001
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Title (01-03)
Title 01
Title 02
Title 03
Chapter(001-015)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Chapter 005
Chapter 006
Chapter 007
Chapter 008
ENTER
PLAY
2• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 134.
DVD-Video
DivX
+
MAIN SUB
SUBTITLE
Playback
08
96
En
Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two
or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you
can switch the soundtrack during playback.
1
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack
options.
Change the audio soundtrack.
The current audio language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
The sound may drop out for a few seconds when
switching soundtracks.
Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,
connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/
receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital
output. See Connecting other AV sources on page 52
for connection details.
Switching audio channels
For HDD
2
and VR mode content recorded with bilingual
audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R)
channel, or both (L+R).
3
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right
channel.
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these
discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as
well as individual channels in each.
Press repeatedly to display/switch the
audio channel.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-
screen.
L+R – Both channels (default)
L – Left channel only
R – Right channel only
Stereo – Stereo (default)
1/L – Left channel only
2/R – Right channel only
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)
1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel
Switching camera angles
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be
marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see
Angle Indicator on page 136).
Switch the camera angle.
The angle number is displayed on-screen.
If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
new angle.
Note
1• Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 134.
2 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 135).
3• When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot
switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 133) or listen via the analog outputs
if you need to switch the audio channel.
• When playing a Dolby Digital source, you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer—see Dual mono
setting on page 29.
DVD-Video
DivX
+
AUDIO
MAIN SUB
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
HDD
CD Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
+
AUDIO
MAIN SUB
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
CD Video CD
WMA/MP3
Super VCD
DVD-Video
+
MAIN SUB
ANGLE
Playback
08
97
En
Displaying disc information on-screen
You can display various on-screen information about the
disc loaded or the HDD.
Display/change the on-screen information.
Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
To hide the information display, press DISPLAY
repeatedly until it disappears.
HDD and removable disc activity display
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD/DVD button to switch
between the two kinds of display.
The example displays below show high-speed copying
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.
Tip
See Switching camera angles on page 96 for more on
multi-angle scene switching.
When using the simultaneous play and record
feature, the display shows information for playback
only.
During real-time copy, the copy source playback
information is displayed.
The Video mode disc displays become the same as a
DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis
is calculated based on a
12 cm / 4.7 GB disc at the displayed record setting.
Recording and playback times for TV recordings are
approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time.
This is because of the slightly different frame rates of
TV broadcasts versus DVD.
The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time
display when the disc is paused.
Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that
the broadcast TV program contains copy control
information.
DISPLA
Y
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Remain –h––m
Stop
Hi-Speed Copy
HDD DVD
0h08m left
DVD-RW Video
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
DVD-RW Video
Relative playback position
Recording time
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Disc Name : Comedy shows
DVD Mode
Finalized
Resume
XP (1h00m/DVD)
Rem. 0h35m Copy Once
Stereo
ABC Pr 1
Shows recording restrictions for
the current channel program
Play
DVD-R Video
Title Name 21/11 Football match:
Chapter Total

Chapter Time
3–2 0. 00. 15 !
0. 00. 21
0h01m52s
4.32Mbps
Indicates copy-protected material
Indicates a multi-angle scene
Indicates the data transfer rate
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
09
98
En
Chapter 9
Playing and recording from a DV
camcorder
You can play back and record video from a DV camcorder
connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this
recorder.
Important
If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
you cannot control the second unit from this one.
You can’t control this unit remotely from a component
connected to the DV IN jack.
Playing from a DV camcorder
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN jack.
2 From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See DV Input on page 133 for more on this.
Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In on page 133).
3 Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video Playback’
from the Home Menu.
4 Start playback on the camcorder.
Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV.
To record the incoming video, press HDD/DVD to select
the HDD or a DVD for recording, then press ì REC.
Press
STOP REC to finish recording.
If there is no signal from the device connected to the
DV jack, or the signal is copy-protected, recording
will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a
recordable signal.
The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if
the signal is interrupted during recording.
If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard,
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 79 for more details.
Recording from a DV camcorder
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control both the
camcorder and this recorder.
Important
The source signal must be DVC-SD format.
Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
recorder’s remote.
You can’t record date and time information from DV
cassette.
During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, this recorder will
stop recording and the camcorder should stop
(depending on the camcorder).
For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to
this recorder, we recommend cueing the camcorder to
the place you want to start recording from and setting the
camcorder to play-pause.
1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
2 Set the recording quality.
See Setting the picture quality/recording time on
page 82 for detailed information.
3 From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See DV Input on page 133 for more on this.
Check also that the Audio In settings for External
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want
them (see Audio In on page 133).
4 Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a DV
Source’ from the Home Menu.
DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is
in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
5 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or
‘Record to DVD’.
HOME MENU
REC MODE
HOME MENU
ENTER
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder
09
99
En
6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you
want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point from which
you want to record.
Depending on your camcorder, you can use this
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the
, , , , , and buttons.
7 Select ‘Start Rec’.
You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not
be recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder
instead and recording will start immediately.
HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter
marker is inserted every time there is a break in the
timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the
recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for
example.
If you don’t want to see the DV recording screen
during recording, press DISPLAY to hide it (press
again to display).
While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT
button.
Frequently Asked Questions
•I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
copy-protected.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
then switch back on.
There’s a picture, but no sound!
Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on
page 133) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
1
DV video setting
Use this setting to adjust the picture quality of the
incoming video from the DV device connected to the DV
jack of this recorder.
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video Setting’
from the Home Menu.
For detailed information on this setting, see Setting the
picture quality for TV and external inputs on page 126.
About DV
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-1995, you
can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV
cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.
This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time to this recorder.
You cannot control this recorder from external
equipment connected via the DV IN jack.
It may not always be possible to control the connected
camcorder via the DV IN jack.
DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo
16-bit / 48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit / 32 kHz.
This recorder can only record one stereo audio track.
Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input on
page 133).
Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48
kHz (not 44.1 kHz).
Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable is disconnected.
The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output
functionality.
Note
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually
from the External Audio setting (page 133).
ENTER
Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
SP (2h00m/DVD)
32h45m
Stop Stop
1.02.22
Control with these
buttons

Rem.
HDD
HOME MENU
Editing
10
100
En
Chapter 10
Editing
Editing options
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.
*1 DVD-R/-RW only
HDD
DVD-R/-RW
(Video mode),
DVD+R/+RW
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM
(VR mode)
Original Play List
Create (page 102)
ì
Play (page 102)
ìììì
Erase (page 102)
ìììì
Edit > Title Name (page 103)
ìììì
Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 103)
ìììì
Edit > Erase Section (page 104)
ììì
Edit > Divide (page 105)
ìì
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 105)
ììì
Edit > Set Genre (page 106)
ì
Edit > Lock (page 107)
ììì
Edit > Move (page 107)
ì
Edit > Combine (page 108)
ì
Genre Name (page 108)
ì
Multi-Mode (page 109)
ì
Undo (page 109)
ìì
*1 ì *1
Editing
10
101
En
The Disc Navigator screen
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video
content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD-R/
-RW discs, DVD+R/+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as
video content on the hard disk drive.
Important
Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line
System setting different to the current setting of the
recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also Additional information
about the TV system settings on page 138.
During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line
System setting different to the current setting of the
recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be
played.
1 Select the HDD or DVD.
2 Display the Disc Navigator screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.
The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home
Menu.
Press to display the command menu panel.
Use the / and ENTER buttons to navigate the
menus.
When in the title list, press to display the
previous/next page if there are more titles than can
be displayed.
Press to change the title information displayed
in the title list.
Press to switch between the HDD and DVD
Disc Navigator screens.
If you are editing a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-
RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting
Play List from the view options panel (press , then
select Play List from the view options, then Play List).
Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are
recently recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.
3 Press to exit the Disc Navigator.
Editing accuracy
Some editing commands ask you whether you want to
keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy (Video
Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).
Frame accurate editing is very precise. The edit point is
accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this
accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use
the high-speed copy function to make a Video mode DVD.
Video mode compatible editing is less precise. The edit
point you choose will only be accurate to within 0.5 to 1
second. On the other hand, these edit points will be
preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a Video
mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW.
HDD genres
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content you can assign different genres
to titles. There are 20 genres in total, including five user-
definable ones that you can name as you like.
HDD/DVD
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
Recent first
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
HDD
SP
MENU
View options panel
Selected
title
Command
menu panel
Title thumbnail Title information
Title list
Available
recording time
ENTER
PREV NEXT
DISPLA
Y
HDD/DVD
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
HDD
SP
MENU
Original
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Style
4 Titles
PlayList
Original
DISC
NAVIGATOR
Editing
10
102
En
Create
Play List only
Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.
Before you can use this command, make sure that the
Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the
left.
1 Select ‘Create’ from the command menu
panel.
2
Select an original title to add to the Play List.
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as necessary
to the Play List.
Play
Use this function to start playback of a title.
1 Highlight the title you want to play.
2 Select ‘Play’ from the command menu panel.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Erase
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.
When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles
from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video mode
DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc increases the available
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.
1
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode
or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not result in any more free
space on the disc.
1 Highlight the title you want to erase.
2 Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu
panel.
3 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Tip
You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER.
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
ENTER
Disc Navigator (DVD)
2h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Remain
0Titles
0h30m
DVD
VR Mode
2h00m(1.0G)
Play List
Play
Erase
Edit
Undo
Create
No title
ENTER
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
ENTER
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
HDD
SP
Recent first
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Genre Name
Multi-Mode
Note
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
Editing
10
103
En
Title Name
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to
40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD+R/
+RW discs.
1 Highlight the title you want to name (or
rename).
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the
command menu panel.
3 Input a name for the selected title.
•A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the / buttons to change the cursor
position.
Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (
PREV/ NEXT).
You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name).
For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
4 Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and return
to the main Disc Navigator screen.
To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press
RETURN/EXIT
.
Set Thumbnail
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in
the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in
that title.
1 Highlight the title you want to change
the thumbnail picture for.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the
command menu panel.
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you
can find the frame you want.
3 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.
You can also use the chapter and time search features
(press PLAY MODE), and the CM SKIP and CM
BACK buttons.
4 Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen.
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD
ENTER
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
HDD
SP
Recent first
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Divide
Chapter Edit
ENTER
Input Title Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear Space
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç
E E E E I I I I
#
2
3
´
µ ¶ ·
1
¿
`
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y
ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_
&
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ®
_
˚
+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | }
~
¡
c
a
o
<<
<<
1
/
4
1
/
2
3
/
4
¸
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
ENTER
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
ENTER
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent first
HDD
SP
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Chapter Edit
Set Thumbnail (HDD)
Play Pause
Rec. time
2h00m
10-1
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
00.00.09.15
Exit
OK
Exit
OK
ENTER
Editing
10
104
En
Erase Section
Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal
for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording
made from the TV.
1 Highlight the title containing the section
you want to erase.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the
command menu panel.
3 HDD only: Select the type of edit.
For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 101.
4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls
(, , , , etc.) to find the start of the section
to erase, then press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
shows the start of the section.
5 Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find
the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.
6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
When editing VR mode Original content, you may not
be able to erase very short sections (less than five
seconds).
HDD
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
!
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Erase Section (HDD)
Play Pause
Rec. time
2h00m
10-1
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Exit
From
To
00.00.09.15
ENTER
ENTER
Editing
10
105
En
Divide
Play List only
Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that
once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be
recombined into one again.
1 Highlight the title you want to divide.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command
menu panel.
3 HDD only: Select the type of edit.
For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 101.
4 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
find the place you want to divide the title.
5 Press to divide the title at the current
playback position.
6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Chapter Edit
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you
can edit individual chapters within a title, with
commands for erasing, combining and dividing.
1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the
command menu panel.
3 HDD only: Select the type of edit.
For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy on page 101.
4 Select the command you want:
Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use
the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then
press ENTER.
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM
disc or 99 chapters per HDD title).
Erase
1
/Move
2
– Erase or move chapters: Select the
chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER.
Select whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
HDD
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
ENTER
ENTER
!
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Divide Title (HDD)
Play Pause
Rec. time
2h00m
10–1
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
Cancel
00.00.09.15
Divide
ENTER
ENTER
Yes
Divided titles cannot
be combined.
OK?
No
!
Note
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2 VR mode Play List only.
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
HDD
ENTER
ENTER
!
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
Rec. time
1–1
Play
0.00.00
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m
Chapters
5
Exit
Erase/Move
Combine
Divide
Editing
10
106
En
Move command only: Select the destination for the
chapter, and press ENTER.
Combine
1
– Combine two adjacent chapters into
one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER.
5 Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc
Navigator screen.
Set Genre
Use this command to assign a genre to a title.
1 Highlight the title you want to assign a
genre to.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the
command menu panel.
3 Select a genre for the title.
Note
1 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
002 003 005004001
Rec. time
Chapter
1h00m
0h01m
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Exit
Erase/Move
Combine
Divide
Move
Cancel
Erase
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
2 3 541
Rec. time
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m
Exit
Erase/Move
Divide
Combine
ENTER
HDD
ENTER
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent first
HDD
SP
9
8
7
10
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Chapter Edit
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent first
HDD
SP
9
8
7
10
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Edit Chapter
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Divide
No Category
Editing
10
107
En
Lock
Original only
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
it later.
Important
You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
command using the Undo option from the Disc
Navigator menu.
1 Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command
menu panel.
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon.
Move
Play List only
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
List titles.
1 Highlight the title you want to move.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command
menu panel.
3 Select a new position for the title.
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent first
HDD
SP
9
8
7
10
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Chapter Edit
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
ENTER
ENTER
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
12/2 THU 10:00PM
12/2Thu 10:00PM 7ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
12/3 FRI 8:00PM
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
12/3 FRI 11:00PM
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
1
2
3
4
DVD
VR Mode
Play List
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Move
Combine
Chapter Edit
ENTER
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
Play List
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2
1
3
4
MENU
DVD
VR Mode
Insert position
Title to move
Editing
10
108
En
Combine
Play List only
Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.
1 Highlight the title you want to combine.
This title will remain in the same place after combining
with another title.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the
command menu panel.
3 Select another title to combine with the
first.
This title will be appended to the first title selected.
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended
to title 1:
4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Genre Name
Use this command to rename one of the five user-
definable genres (Free 1 to Free 5).
1 Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command
menu panel.
2 Select one of the user-definable genre
names.
3 Input a name for the genre.
The name can be up to 12 characters long.
4 Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and exit.
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
ENTER
ENTER
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
DVD
VR Mode
Play List
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2
1
3
4
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Move
Combine
Chapter Edit
ENTER
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
DVD
VR Mode
MENU
Play List
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2
1
3
4
ENTER
Yes
OK to combine titles
1 and 3 ?
No
!
HDD
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
HDD
SP
Recent first
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
Multi-Mode0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Genre Name
Multi-Mode
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
HDD
SP
Recent first
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Free1
Free2
Free3
Free4
Free5
Cancel
ENTER
Input Genre Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear
Space
Free 1
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç
E E E E I I I I
#
2
3
´
µ ¶ ·
1
¿
`
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y
ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_
&
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ®
_
˚
+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | }
~
¡
c
a
o
<<
<<
1
/
4
1
/
2
3
/
4
¸
ENTER
Editing
10
109
En
Multi-Mode
Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select
a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way
you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at
once, for example.
1 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command
menu panel.
2 Select titles from the title list.
Selected titles are marked with a .
3 Select the command that you want
applied to all the marked titles.
For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.
Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is
automatically exited.
Undo
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you
can only undo the last edit you made).
Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu
panel.
You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc
Navigator screen.
Frequently asked questions
Why doesn’t the available recording time increase
when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD+R), the
titles are no longer displayed, but the content remains
on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once media; they
can’t be erased or rewritten.
•I can’t edit my disc!
You may find that as the available recording time is
reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no
longer possible. This is because information about
your edits requires a certain amount of disc space.
As you edit, this information builds up, eventually
preventing you from editing further.
HDD
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent first
HDD
SP
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Genre Name
Multi-Mode
ENTER
ENTER
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
All Genres
3Titles
30h30m
Recent first
HDD
SP
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Multi-Mode
Change Genre
Lock
Unlock
Single Mode
Erase
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW
ENTER
Disc Navigator (DVD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
0Titles
0h30m
DVD
VR Mode
2h00m(1.0G)
Play List
Play
Erase
Edit
Create
Undo
No title
Copying and backup
11
110
En
Chapter 11
Copying and backup
Introduction
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
a DVD.
Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title
to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy on
page 110 for detailed instructions.
For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a
Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only
copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 111
for detailed instructions.
Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at
high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind
of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be
as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Setting up
the remote to control your TV on page 140 for more on
copying times.
If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a
lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on
the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is
always done in real-time.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode
DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the
original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put
into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto Chapter
settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW) on page 135).
Restrictions on copying
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy
Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD.
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1
or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode
DVD-R, or CPRM-compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM
on page 79 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-
once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and
after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it
is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-
once protected).
You can identify copy-once protected material during
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown.
Copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
One Touch Copy
* See also Copyright above.
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or
DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start the copy.
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording
mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in
whatever recording mode is currently set.
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when
trying to copy from the HDD.
1 If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD,
select a recording mode.
Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title
playing will not result in a better quality recording.
2 Press during playback to copy the current
title.
The front panel display indicates that the title is being
copied.
High-speed copying is used when copying from the
HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.
Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to
the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the
title.
Canceling One Touch Copy
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
Press and hold for more than a second.
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is
erased.
REC MODE
ONE TOUCH COP
Y
ONE TOUCH COP
Y
Copying and backup
11
111
En
If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space
available for recording does not return to the pre-
copy figure.
Notes on copying using One Touch Copy
Copying to DVD
Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail
picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also copied.
However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/-RW or
DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40 characters of a name
are copied.
The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
the same positions as the original when recording on
to a Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW.
You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
•A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be
copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-R/
-RW or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.
Low resolution (SEP through LP modes
1
) widescreen
material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a
VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM disc for this type
of material.
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode
Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9 to MN15 modes
cannot be high-speed copied to a Video mode disc.
Please use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM.
Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-
speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use a VR
mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM.
Titles over 8 hours cannot be copied to single-layer
DVD+R/+RW discs using One Touch Copy. Use
DVD+R DL discs for titles over 8 hours.
Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode
cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using One Touch
Copy.
Copying to the HDD
The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.
Title name and chapter markers are also copied,
except when copying from a finalized Video mode
disc.
Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for
the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in
the copy may be slightly changed from the original.
If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected
,
copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will
not be copied.
Using Copy Lists
* See also Copyright on page 110.
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD
titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to
DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list,
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for
example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not
affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content
of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify
anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the
actual content is not being altered.
Copying from HDD to DVD
Important
The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see Additional information about
the TV system settings on page 138).
Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 153) will erase the
Copy List.
1 Load a recordable DVD.
It is possible to complete the following steps without
having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an
uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are
slightly different.
If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the
copy, make sure it is initialized before you start.
2 Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
3 Select ‘HDD DVD’.
If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to
step 5 below.
Note
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
HOME MENU
ENTER
HDD DVD
Disc Back-up
DVD/CD HDD
Copying and backup
11
112
En
4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’
or ‘Continue Using Previous Copy List’.
If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List,
skip to step 10 below.
Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
5 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a
title and press ENTER to add).
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to
the Copy List if you are copying to a Video mode DVD or
DVD+R/+RW:
When adding titles that contain copy-once protected
material, the copy-once parts will not be added.
When adding titles that contain material of more
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title
if high-speed copying is possible.
Depending on the title
1
, high-speed copying may not be
possible to a Video mode disc.
6 Press to display the command menu panel.
7 Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.
8 To edit a title, highlight it using the /
buttons, then press ENTER.
A menu of editing commands appears:
Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Erase on page 102).
Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List
(see Title Name on page 103).
Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see Erase Section
on page 104).
Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see Move on page 107).
Note
1• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.
• Bilingual recordings.
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.
Continue Using Previous Copy List
Create New Copy List
ENTER
Copy
Select Title
Recent first
All Genres
8 Title
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
0.0G
4.3G
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2
MON 27/03 21:00 Mon 27/03 Pr 4 SP Pr 4
SAT 25/03 23:00 Sat 25/03 Pr 9 SP Pr 9
THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr 6 SP Pr 6
WED 22/03 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2
MON 20/03 13:00 Mon 20/03 Pr 9 SP Pr 9
FRI 17/03 21:00 Fri 17/03 Pr 4 SP Pr 4
WED 15/03 20:00 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2
Back
Next
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
SP
20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Pr 2
Sports
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1
>
2
>
3
Copy
Select Title
Recent first
All Genres
8 Title
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2
MON 27/03 21:00 Mon 27/03 Pr 4 SP Pr 4
SAT 25/03 23:00 Sat 25/03 Pr 9 SP Pr 9
THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr 6 SP Pr 6
WED 22/03 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2
MON 20/03 13:00 Mon 20/03 Pr 9 SP Pr 9
FRI 17/03 21:00 Fri 17/03 Pr 4 SP Pr 4
WED 15/03 20:00 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Pr 2
SP
Sports
HDD DVD (Video mode)
4.3G
4.3G
1
>
2
>
3
Back
Next
The Command Menu panel
Copy
Title Edit
2 Title
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1
2
20:00 Wed 29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP
4.3G
4.3G
1
>
2
>
3
Back
Next
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1
20:00 Wed 29/03 Pr 2 SP
Copy
Title Edit
2 Title
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1
2
20:00 Wed 29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP
4.3G
4.3G
1
>
2
>
3
Back
Next
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
1
20:00 Wed 29/03 Pr 2 SP
Erase
Title Name
Erase Section
Move
Preview
Cancel
Copying and backup
11
113
En
Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy
List.
Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
Divide on page 105).
Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into
one (see Combine on page 108).
Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title
(see Chapter Edit on page 105):
Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
Erase/Move
Erase a chapter/Change the chapter
order.
Combine – Combine two chapters into one.
Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title
(see Set Thumbnail on page 103).
Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy
(see Recording Mode on page 114).
Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied
when copying from HDD to Video mode DVD (see
Bilingual on page 114).
Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
9 Display the command menu panel.
10 Select ‘Next’ to proceed.
There are several options available from the next screen:
Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 114).
1
Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the
disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a
VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc
or DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that
of naming titles; see Title Name on page 103.)
Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a
Video mode DVD or DVD+R after copying.
2
Select a
title menu style from the following screen.
11 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and
the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total
bar will be purple.
The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if
the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is
already full.
Copying from DVD to HDD
Important
The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when
a finalized Video mode disc or a DVD-Video is loaded.
As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you
can still use the One Touch Copy function, however
(See One Touch Copy on page 110).
The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
The Copy List will be erased if:
any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
playback is switched between Play List and Original.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder on page 153).
It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.
1 Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
2 Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.
3 Select a Copy List type.
Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
4 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a
title and press ENTER to add).
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink.
Note
1 Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using high-speed copy.
2 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.
ENTER
ENTER
Copy
Title Edit
2 Title
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1
2
20:00 Wed 29/03 Pr 2 SP
20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP
4.3G
4.3G
1
>
2
>
3
Back
Next
20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(2.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
ENTER
Copy HDD DVD (Video Mode)
Start Copy
Copy Time 0h 16m
Recording Mode
Disc Name
Finalize
Return
Recording Mode
Input Disc Name
Finalize
Start Copy
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
4.3G
4.3G
DVD-RW
Video Mode
HDD
High-Speed
Off
1 > 2 > 3
HOME MENU
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
Copying and backup
11
114
En
5 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu
panel to proceed to the title edit screen.
6 Select a title to edit.
A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:
Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Erase on page 102).
Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see Move on page 107).
Preview
– Check the content of a title in the Copy List.
Cancel – Exit the menu.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
7 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu
panel to proceed to the copy options screen.
Select Recording Mode if you want to change the
recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 114).
8 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
Recording Mode
1 Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the
command menu panel.
2 Select a recording mode for the copy.
High-Speed Copy
1
– The Copy List is copied at the
same recording quality as the original.
XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN
2
– The Copy List is
copied at the specified recording quality in real-time.
(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than
the original, the copy will not be better quality than
the original.)
If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1 to MN32
3
or LPCM) from the Recording
Quality box that appears.
Optimized
2,4
– The recording quality is automatically
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-
time.
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording
quality, or press RETURN/EXIT to go back to the Copy List
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.
Bilingual
1 Select the title containing the audio you
want to change.
2 Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command
menu panel.
3 Select a bilingual audio option.
Using disc backup
* See also Copyright on page 110.
This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy
of a finalized Video mode disc or DVD+R/+RW. The data
is copied first to the hard disk drive
5
, then on to another
recordable DVD disc.
1 Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’ from
the Home Menu.
2 Select a backup option.
There are three backup options:
Note
1 When copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original.
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers
of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto
Chapter (Video)) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 135.
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
4 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.
5 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
HOME MENU
ENTER
Start new disc back-up
Resume writing data
Erase back-up data
Copying and backup
11
115
En
Start new disc back-up – Start making a backup of
a disc.
Resume writing data – Record the backup data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
Erase back-up data – Erase the backup data on the
HDD.
3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of.
You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode
discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs (excluding
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).
4 Select ‘Start’.
To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY.
You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE
TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc
and load a blank* recordable DVD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn’t
have to be blank, although the previous contents of the
disc will be erased in the backup process.
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or DVD-RW ver.
1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup.
If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot
undo the finalization later.
Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of disc.
DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/-
RW discs; DVD+R/+RW discs can only be backed
up to DVD+R/+RW discs.
6 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.
To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY.
You can cancel the backup process by pressing
ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
However, this will make the disc unusable (although
if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can
re-initialize it in order to make it usable again—see
Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 87.)
7 After the recorder has finished recording the
backup disc, you can select whether to make another
backup of the same data or exit.
Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel
to finish. If you want to make another backup copy,
return to step 6 above.
8 If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the
HDD, you can delete it now.
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD,
you can make backup copies to recordable DVD
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
No disc.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start
Cancel
Disc Back-up
ENTER
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
Start
Cancel
Disc Back-up
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc
Start
Cancel
Disc Back-up
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Start
Cancel
Disc Back-up
Disc back-up finished.
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Start
Cancel
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
Yes
No
Disc Back-up
Using the Jukebox
12
116
En
Chapter 12
Using the Jukebox
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s
HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your
CDs. You can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-
R/-RW/-ROM or USB device. Once on the HDD, you can
name albums, assign them a genre, and set tracks that
you don’t want to play to Jump.
Copying music to the HDD
The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD
audio is copied in real-time, while WMA and MP3 files are
copied at high speed. All tracks are copied from each
CD
1
as an album.
WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied along with
the audio. CD album and track names are not copied, but
you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on
page 117).
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order
they appear on the CD. When copying CD audio, you can
copy them in some other order using the program play
mode. See Program play on page 95 for how to do this.
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot
be copied to a recordable DVD disc.
Important
While copying CD audio, no other recorder operation
is possible.
When copying CD audio, scheduled timer recordings
will not start until copying is complete.
Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.
1 Load the CD you want to copy to the HDD.
2 Select ‘Copy’ from the Home Menu.
3 Select ‘DVD/CD to HDD’.
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD are
copied to the HDD.
You can also start copying by starting playback of
the CD (including program play) and then pressing
ONE TOUCH COPY.
To cancel copying an audio CD, press and hold
ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
To cancel copying a WMA/MP3 disc, press ENTER.
If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will play.
Copying files from a USB device
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB
device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD.
1 Connect the USB device.
2 Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
3 Select ‘Listen to Music from USB Device’.
4 Select ‘Copy Album’ from the command
menu panel.
5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
The selected folder on the USB device will be copied to
the HDD.
Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be
copied/displayed.
Playing music from the Jukebox
You can select albums or individual tracks from the
Jukebox to play.
2
1 Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
2 Select a Jukebox option.
Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs that have been
copied to the HDD.
Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit – Listen to WMA
or MP3 files that have been stored on the HDD.
Listen to Music from USB device – Listen to music
from an external USB device.
Note
1 The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps Dolby Digital.
HOME MENU
ENTER
2 The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD.
HOME MENU
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
HOME MENU
ENTER
Using the Jukebox
12
117
En
3 Select what you want to play.
The screen below shows CD albums stored on the HDD:
If you select a whole album to play, all tracks that are
not set to Jump will play.
If you want to start playback from a selected track in
an album, or play a track that is set to Jump, press
to enter the track list then select a track to play.
Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page.
Changing the album view
1 From the album list, display the view
options menu panel.
2 Select a view option.
Sort order
By number – Albums are listed by the album
number.
By favorite – Most often listened to music appears
at the top of the list.
By album – Albums are listed alphabetically.
Genre
All Genres – All albums are displayed.
Genre – Only albums in the selected genre are
displayed.
Editing Jukebox albums
A number of commands are available for editing and
changing the playback behavior of albums.
1 Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home Menu.
2 Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’ or ‘Listen to
Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit’.
3 Select what you want to edit.
4 Select an edit function from the
command menu panel.
Erase – Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an
album are selected, the whole album is erased).
Edit > Edit Title – Enter a name of up to 64
characters for the album. See page Title Name on
page 103 for how to enter names.
Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the genre for the
album.
Edit > Jump Set
1
– Set a track to jump so that it
doesn't play (choose this command again to cancel
the Jump setting).
Play Mode – Change the playback order for albums
and tracks.
Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters
for a genre. See page Title Name on page 103 for how
to enter names.
ENTER
HDD
By number
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical
Total 12 1.14.58
10Albums
Jukebox
60h30m
Remain
All Genres
Play
Erase
Edit
Play Mode
Genre Name
1-10
0.03.58
ALL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
Album2
5
Album3
6
Album4
7
Album5
8
Album6
9
Album7
10
Album8
3
Album1
Album name
Info for selected album Playback status
ENTER
ENTER
12/1
1
HDD
New First
10Albums
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical
Total 12 1.14.58
Jukebox
60h30m
Remain
2
Album2
3
Album3
4
Album4
5
Album5
6
Album6
7
Album7
8
Album8
1
Album1
All Genres
1-10
0.03.58
Sort order
Genre
All Genres
Play
Erase
Edit
Play Mode
Genre Name
By number
ALL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
By number
By favorite
Cancel
By album
Note
1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.
12
/
1
1
HDD
New First
10Albums
Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup
iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical
Total 12 1.14.58
Jukebox
60h30m
Remain
2
Album2
3
Album3
4
Album4
5
Album5
6
Album6
7
Album7
8
Album8
1
Album1
All Genres
1-10
0.03.58
Sort order
By number
Genre
All Genres
Play
Erase
Edit
Play Mode
Genre Name
ALL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
All Genres
No Category
Jazz
Classical
Pop
Rock
Best
HOME MENU
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
The PhotoViewer
13
118
En
Chapter 13
The PhotoViewer
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and
picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CD-R/
-RW/-ROM, or on a USB-equipped digital camera.
1
You
can also import files and save them to the recorder’s
HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.
Locating JPEG picture files
1
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the Home Menu.
2 Select the location of the files you want
to view or edit.
View/Edit photos on the HDD – View or edit photos
already stored on the recorder’s HDD.
View photos on a CD/DVD – View photos on a
Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW.
View photos on a USB device – View photos on a
digital camera (or other USB device) connected to
the USB port.
Copy photos from a USB device – Copy all photos
on a connected USB device to the HDD.
3 Select the folder containing the files you
want to view, copy or edit.
If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created
disc compatibility on page 44).
Note
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible
to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 119).
HOME MENU
ENTER
View/Edit photos on the HDD
View photos on a USB device
Copy photos from a USB device
View photos on a CD/DVD
ENTER
PhotoViewer HDD
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
10:00 24/01/2006
1920
x
1440
Size
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
Currently selected
thumbnail
Incompatible/
unknown file
File information
Pages in
file view
Pages in
folder list
Currently selected
folder in folder list
The PhotoViewer
13
119
En
Playing a slideshow
1 Select a folder from the folder list.
The first nine images from the selected folder are
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.
The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder
to load the file.
To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder,
skip to step 4 after pressing ENTER.
2 Select ‘File Selection’ from the menu.
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.
You can also select a folder, then press to get to
the thumbnail view area.
To get back to the folder list, press RETURN/EXIT (or
when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).
3 Select a thumbnail.
Use PREV and NEXT to display the
previous/next page of thumbnails.
4 Select ‘Start Slideshow’ from the menu.
You can also select a file or folder then press PLAY
to start playing the slideshow.
Use PREV / NEXT to display the previous/
next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow.
Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and
right.
Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.
This is normal.
During playback of the slideshow you can listen to
WMA/MP3 files in the Slideshow genre (see Editing
Jukebox albums on page 117).
5 Press to return to the thumbnail view area.
You can also use the RETURN/EXIT button.
6 Press to return to the folder view area.
With the leftmost thumbnail highlighted, you can use
the button.
To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.
Reloading files from a disc or USB device
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
function.
1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list
(‘Read next: ...’).
2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99
folders from the disc or connected USB device.
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in
the images.
1
Zooming an image
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1 Press during the slideshow to zoom the
picture.
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
2 Use to move the zoomed area.
Rotating an image
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
Press during the slideshow to rotate
the displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in
increments of 90º.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
STOP
RETURN
Note
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will
resume reloading if from a CD or DVD.)
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
+
MAIN SUB
ANGLE
The PhotoViewer
13
120
En
Importing files to the HDD
You can import files and save them on to the HDD
1
from
a CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the
HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print
them out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible
printer.
1 Select the location of folders/files you
want to import.
To import a whole folder, press ENTER here and skip to
step 4 below.
To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders on page 120.
2 Select ‘File Selection’ from the menu.
3 Select a file to import, then press ENTER
..
..
To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders
on page 120.
4 Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the menu.
5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the
folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel.
The files will be copied to the HDD with the same
folder structure as the original.
Importing to the HDD will not work if there is
insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already
the maximum number of files and/or folders on the
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).
Selecting multiple files or folders
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files
at once for importing or editing.
1 Select the folder containing the files you
want to import.
2 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the menu.
3 To add a file/folder to the list, select it,
then choose ‘Select’ from the menu.
A checkbox mark (
) is shown by the item you selected.
You can also select a file or folder and press
STOP
to add it to the list.
To remove a file/folder from the list, select
Cancel
Selection
from the menu.
4 Display the command menu.
5 Select the command you want to apply to
all the selected items.
Note
1 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
10:00 24/01/2006
1920
x
1440
CD/DVD
Size
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
Start Slideshow
Copy all to HDD
Copy to HDD
Print
Multi-Mode
Cancel
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Folder 12/13 WED
HDD
Use [][] to select, then press [] to
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.
File selection
Start Slideshow
New Folder
Folder Options
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
ENTER
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
10:00 24/01/2006
1920
x
1440
HDD Multi-Mode
Size
Press STOP or ENTER to display the menu
and cancel selection.
ENTER
ENTER
The PhotoViewer
13
121
En
Importing files from a USB device
Use this feature to copy all the files on a connected USB
device to this recorder’s HDD.
Important
After backing up the pictures on your USB device to
HDD, we recommend verifying that they have been
recorded properly before deleting anything from the
camera.
1 Select ‘Copy photos from a USB device’
from the main PhotoViewer menu.
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
While the files are being imported, any timer
programs set to start will not begin, and no other
operation is possible.
Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW
This feature allows you just to copy some of the files
stored on HDD to a DVD.
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a
Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on
other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible
with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need
to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD
player (copying selected files doesn’t automatically
finalize the disc).
Important
•A maximum of 99 titles can be recorded.
Slideshows can contain up to 99 files. If there are
more files than this in the slideshow, multiple
slideshows are created on the disc.
If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the
slideshow will become unplayable but the free space
will not increase.
1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R
or DVD-RW disc.
2 Select ‘View/Edit Photos on the HDD’
from the menu.
3 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
copy.
Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders
on page 120.
4 Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the menu.
5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.
Folder names on the disc will be
number
PIONR
. File
names will be
PHOT
number.
Note that during copying, any timer programs set to
start will not begin, and no other operation is possible.
While
‘Cancel’
is displayed, you can press
ENTER
to
cancel.
Editing files on the HDD
There are a number of commands you can use to edit and
organize your pictures stored on the HDD.
Creating a new folder
1 From the folder list, display the menu.
2 Select ‘New Folder’.
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the
name
F_
number
.
There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Folder 12/13 WED
HDD
Use [][] to select, then press [] to
select file. Press ENTER to display menu.
File selection
Start Slideshow
New Folder
Folder Options
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
The PhotoViewer
13
122
En
Erasing a file or folder
1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
erase.
To erase multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders
on page 120.
Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it.
Please be careful!
You can’t erase files that have been locked.
Folders containing locked files can’t be erased.
Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased.
2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
3 Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.
4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
You can also erase a file or folder by pressing
CLEAR
when the file or folder is highlighted. Press
ENTER
to
confirm.
Copying files
1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to
copy.
Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders
on page 120.
2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
3 Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder Contents’.
4
Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s) to.
5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.
Copying to the HDD will not work if there is
insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the
maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD.
ENTER
ENTER
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
10:00 24/01/2006
1920
x
1440
HDD
Size
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
Start Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
ENTER
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
10:00 24/01/2006
1920
x
1440
HDD
Size
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
Start Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Erase
Copy
Rename File
Lock
Cancel
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
24/01/2006 10:00AM
1920
x
1440
HDD
Size
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
Start Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Erase
Copy
Rename File
Lock
Cancel
ENTER
ENTER
The PhotoViewer
13
123
En
Naming files and folders
1 Select the file or folder you want to rename.
You can’t rename files that have been locked.
2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
3 Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename Folder’.
4 Enter a new name for the file/folder.
Filenames or Foldernames can be up to 64 characters
long.
Locking/Unlocking files
Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure
and prevent them from being renamed.
Use the same process to both lock and unlock files.
Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a
padlock icon.
1 Select the file(s) you want to lock (or
unlock).
To lock/unlock multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode;
see
Selecting multiple files or folders
on page 120.
2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’.
3 Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder Contents’.
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them.
Printing files
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB
port will enable you to print out picture files
1
stored on
the HDD, or directly from a digital camera.
Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you
are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder
before starting.
1 Select the file(s) you want to print.
To print multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see
Selecting multiple files or folders
on page 120.
2 Select ‘Print’ from the menu.
It takes a moment for the recorder to communicate with
the printer. During this time you can press
ENTER
to
cancel the print.
3 Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or ‘Cancel’ to
cancel.
Once printing has started, you can cancel by
pressing
ENTER
.
Tip
Paper size and layout can be set; the options
available depend on your printer—check the printer
manual for details.
If the message
Searching for printer. Please wait a
moment
continues to be displayed, try disconnecting
then reconnecting the USB cable.
This recorder may not work correctly with all printers.
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
10:00 24/01/2006
1920
x
1440
HDD
Size
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
Start Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Erase
Copy
Rename File
Lock
Cancel
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
10:00 24/01/2006
1920
x
1440
HDD
Size
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
Start Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
Erase
Copy
Rename File
Lock
Cancel
Note
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.
ENTER
ENTER
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
001. 12/12 TUE
002. 12/13 WED
003. 12/14 THU
004. 12/15 FRI
005. 12/16 SAT
006. 12/17 SUN
007. 12/18 MON
008. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
10:00 24/01/2006
1920
x
1440
HDD
Size
Press ENTER to display the menu.
Press RETURN to go back to folder selection.
Start Slideshow
File Options
Print
Copy to DVD
Multi-Mode
Cancel
ENTER
The Disc Setup menu
14
124
En
Chapter 14
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu:
Basic settings
Input Disc Name
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from
DISC 1
to
DISC 99
. You can use the Input Disc Name
function to change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2 Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc Name’ > ‘Next
Screen’.
3 Input a name for the disc.
The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR
mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.
See
Title Name
on page 103 for more on navigating
the input screen.
Lock Disc
Default setting:
Off
Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording,
editing or erasing of the disc.
Important
•A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock disc’ then ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Set to
On
to prevent accidental recording, editing or
erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc
to make edits, select
Off
.
Initialize settings
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either
VR mode or Video mode recording.
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be
automatically initialized for recording according to the
DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 135).
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording
when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize
them for VR mode recording.
1
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as
a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVD-
RAM disc, select VR mode.
See
Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 87 for
detailed instructions.
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM
HOME MENU
ENTER
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Basic
Input Disc Name
Next ScreenInput Disc Name
ENTER
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM
Note
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode,
the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.
HOME MENU
ENTER
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Basic
On
Off
Lock Disc
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM
The Disc Setup menu
14
125
En
Finalize settings
Finalize
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs. This is only
necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu
for the disc.
See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on
page 86 for detailed instructions.
Undo Finalize
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
want to record more material or edit material already on
the disc.
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be
recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc using this
recorder.
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo Finalize’ then ‘Start’.
Optimize HDD
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will
automatically display a message recommending
optimization.
Important
Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours.
During optimization, playback and recording are not
possible.
Canceling optimization mid-way does not undo the
optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly
optimized.
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2 Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then ‘Start’.
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go.
Initialize HDD
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for
some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the
problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the
data on it.
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the Home Menu.
2 Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then ‘Start’.
DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW
DVD-RW
HOME MENU
ENTER
HDD
HOME MENU
ENTER
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Optimize HDD
Optimize HDD
Start
Optimize HDD
HDD
HOME MENU
ENTER
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Initialize HDD
Optimize HDD
Start
Initialize HDD
The Video Adjust menu
15
126
En
Chapter 15
The Video Adjust menu
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture
quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc
playback, and for recording.
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external
input. There are several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.
Choosing a preset
1 With the recorder stopped, press to
display the Home Menu.
2 Select ‘Video Adjust’.
Select the DV input by selecting DV then DV Video
Setting from the Home Menu.
3 Select a preset.
Use the VIDEO IN button to switch between the built-
in TV tuner and the external inputs (not possible if you
selected DV Video Setting in step 2 (above)).
Use the PREV/ NEXT buttons to change the
channel of the built-in TV tuner.
There are six presets available:
Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts
VCR – suitable for video cassettes
DTV/LDP – suitable for digital broadcasts and
Laserdiscs
Memory1 – user preset 1
Memory2 – user preset 2
Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (Tuner, VCR or DTV/LDP).
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
3 Select the setting you want to adjust.
You can adjust the following settings:
Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually set to Auto; but try switching to
Off if the picture appears unnatural.
3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness / colour separation
(NTSC video input only).
YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level
adjustment.
1
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video input only).
HOME MENU
ENTER
ENTER
Detailed Settings
Pr 1
Tuner
Note
1 When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can’t be adjusted.
ENTER
Detailed Settings
Pr 1
Memory1
ENTER
Memory1
3-D Y/C
Motion Still
PureCinma
Prog. Motion
Auto1
Motion Still
Pr 1
White Level
CNR
YNR
White AGC
Off
Max
Off
Off
Max
MaxMin
The Video Adjust menu
15
127
En
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
4 Adjust the currently selected setting.
5 Press to exit.
You can now use the preset for any other input or the
built-in TV tuner.
Tip
To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback
This setting determines how the picture will look when
playing discs.
Choosing a preset
1 With a disc playing (or paused), press to
display the Home Menu.
2 Select ‘Video Adjust’.
3 Select a setting.
There are six presets available:
TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs
PDP – suitable for plasma display screens
Professional – suitable for professional monitors
Memory1 – user preset 1
Memory2 – user preset 2
Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (TV, PDP or Professional).
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
Settings’.
ENTER
HOME MENU
HOME MENU
ENTER
ENTER
Detailed Settings
TV
Detailed Settings
Memory1
The Video Adjust menu
15
128
En
3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust.
You can adjust the following settings:
Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog.
Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.)
PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching
to Auto 2, On or Off if the picture appears unnatural.
Subtitle Adjust – When the video output is set to
progressive scan, it’s possible that the subtitles in
some movies will disappear unnaturally. In this case
select the On setting (only possible when connected
using HDMI).
YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component (only possible
when connected using HDMI).
BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of
flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).
MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible
around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG
compression).
Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of the high-
frequency (detailed) elements in the picture.
Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video playback on the Interlace video
output setting only). (Black Setup is ineffective for
HDMI output.)
Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of
darker images.
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
4 Use the / buttons to adjust the currently
selected picture quality setting.
5 When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
Tip
To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
YNR and Detail are ineffective for analog and
component video when the Video Priority Mode is set
to HDMI. Set to Component to make effective for
both analog and HDMI video. See page 137.
Memory1
Subtitle Adjust
YNR
Motion Still
PureCinma
Prog. Motion
Auto1
Off Max
Off Max
BNR
MNR
Max
Max
Off
Min
CNR
On
The Initial Setup menu
16
129
En
Chapter 16
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are
grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.
Setting Options Explanation
Basic
Clock Setting Auto Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set
automatically.
Manual • If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can
set the time and date manually.
• If any digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set.
• The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
Input Line System 525 System Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.
625 System • Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.
• This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input.
• See also About the input line system on page 138 for more information on this setting.
Power Save Mode 1 Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the
antenna output when the recorder is in standby.
Mode 2 No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is
in standby.
Off • When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and
antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs.
HELP Setting On • Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.
Off Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on
the remote to manually display the Help screen.)
EPG Type Select GUIDE Plus+ Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG.
Digital EPG Use the EPG based on information provided by D.TV broadcasts.
Pause Live TV TV’s Tuner • Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-compatible TV
connected by SCART cable.
Recorder’s Tuner Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder’s internal TV tuner.
See also Pause Live TV on page 83 for more information on this setting.
Setup Navigator Start
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also
Switching on and setting up
on page 56
.
The Initial Setup menu
16
130
En
Digital Tuner
Replace Channels Next Screen Scans for digital channels and replaces all the channel presets with the
results. Before the scan starts you will need to select your country.
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels
were found, and if so, how many.
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU
or RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no channels are set.)
If you execute a Replace Channels command, any timer recordings set for D.TV channels will be erased.
Add New Channels Next Screen Automatically scans for new digital channels.
After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels
were found, and if so, how many.
(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU
or RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no new channels are set.)
Channel Sort Next Screen Use this screen to sort channel presets into your preferred order. Use the
/// buttons to highlight the channel you want to move, press ENTER.
Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the position you want to move
the channel preset to, then press ENTER again.
(If there are more channel presets than will fit on one screen, you can
select the next/previous page by highlighting the small triangular marks
and pressing ENTER.)
Channel Options Next Screen From this screen you can skip or lock channels. Locked channels will
require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be
watched. Use the /// buttons to highlight a preference box and
press ENTER to toggle the preference.
To enter this screen, input the parental lock password when prompted (if
one has not yet been set then the password you enter becomes the parental
lock password).
Auto Skip Off • No channels are automatically skipped.
Radio Radio channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Data Data channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Radio & Data Radio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Signal Check Next Screen Use this screen to check the signal level and quality of digital channels.
Use the / buttons to change the RF channel; select Add New Channels
then press ENTER to scan for new channels; press HOME MENU to exit.
Aerial Power On Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) when this recorder is
on or in standby.
Auto
Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) only when this recorder
is on.
Off • This recorder does not supply power to the connected aerial (antenna).
• If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto, the aerial may not be connected properly, or it may be shorted. In either
case, check the connection and try making the setting again.
D.TV Language Next Screen
From this screen you can set your Primary and Secondary Audio preference
for multilingual digital broadcasts, and your Primary and Secondary
Subtitle preference for programs that are broadcast with subtitles. Use
the / buttons to highlight a field then use the / buttons to change it.
Setting Options Explanation
The Initial Setup menu
16
131
En
Analog Tuner
Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels
in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen
appears showing which channels have been assigned to which program
numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting
option below.
Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen.
Download from TV If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that
your TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait
for the download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel
mapping screen appears, as above.
See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more
information.
Manual CH Setting Next Screen Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made
by auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel
setting screen:
• Change channel presets using the
PREV/ NEXT buttons.
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to
that channel), change the Skip setting to On.
Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country
or region.
Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current
channel preset.
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then
adjust the Level setting.
Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region.
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for
the current channel preset.
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder
connected to the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
, set the
Decoder
setting to
On
.
Channel Swapping Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different
presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go together.
Select two presets to swap then press ENTER.
Setting Options Explanation
The Initial Setup menu
16
132
En
Video In/Out
Input Colour System Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external
input and the built-in TV tuner. Use the VIDEO IN buttons to change the
preset or external input. On the default Auto setting the recorder can
generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58
NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the
picture is displayed incorrectly.
• Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D.TV mode.
• See also About the input colour system on page 139 for more information on this setting.
Component Video
Out
Interlace • Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video.
Progressive Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the
operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.
For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see below) must be set to something other than RGB.
If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all
. In this case,
press
ONE TOUCH COPY while holding down the (STOP) button on the front panel to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen
Resolution
on page 137 to the default setting).
When an HDMI device is connected and Video Priority Mode is set to
HDMI
, the Component Video Out setting is automatically set to
Interlace
.
AV1 Out Video • Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video
(compatible with all TVs).
S-Video Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video. Recommended if you are
using a long SCART cable.
RGB
Sets the
AV1(RGB)-TV
SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your
TV for compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner
and from external inputs is not output when the recorder is in TV mode.
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect
using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 153).
The Component Video Out setting (see above) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB.
AV2/L1 In Video • Sets the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite
video.
S-Video Sets the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-video.
RGB Sets the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB.
Decoder
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel
Decoder
setting is set to
On
. (See
Manual CH Setting
page 131.)
When the Input Line System is set to 525 System, RGB cannot be selected.
Even when set to RGB. depending on the connected device, the input signal may be composite video.
NTSC on PAL TV On • NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.
Off Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with
your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 138 for related information.
Setting Options Explanation
The Initial Setup menu
16
133
En
Audio In
NICAM Select NICAM • Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
Regular Audio Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still switch
the audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.)
Analog Tuner Level Normal • Standard setting.
Compression
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion.
External Audio Stereo • Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard
stereo.
Bilingual Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Bilingual Recording A/L • Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD
with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode
or in LPCM mode, from an external source.
B/R As above, but for right (B) channel recording.
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except
in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.
DV Input Stereo 1 • Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from
a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Stereo 2 Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports
two stereo audio tracks.
Mix Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks.
Audio Out
Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital • Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played.
Dolby Digital
PCM
Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected
equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder.
DTS Out On • Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.
Off Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when
your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use
the analog audio outputs.
96 kHz PCM Out
96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected
equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.
96 kHz Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.
MPEG Out MPEG Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being
played.
MPEG PCM • Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your con-
nected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.
Audio DRC On Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to
Dolby Digital material at low volume.
Off • Switches off Audio DRC.
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. In this case adjust
the dynamic range from the receiver subwoofer—see Dynamic Range Control on page 29.
Setting Options Explanation
The Initial Setup menu
16
134
En
Language
OSD Language English • Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays.
On Screen Display and D.TV Language will both reflect this setting.
Audio Language English • Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language
for DVD-Video playback.
Other Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 139.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.
Subtitle Language English • Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language
for DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones
listed. See
Selecting other languages for language options
on page 139.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.
Auto Language On • On this setting:
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will
play using that language, without subtitles.
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that
have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio
track with subtitles.
Off Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle lan-
guage preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.
DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle
Language
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the
subtitle language.
English Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD-
Video menus.
Other Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones
listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 139.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
Subtitle Display On • Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language
and Auto Language preferences.
Off Select to switch off subtitle display.
Assist Subtitle Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.
Some discs may override these settings.
Setting Options Explanation
The Initial Setup menu
16
135
En
Recording
Manual Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32 and LPCM modes
can be set.
Off • Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be set.
See also Manual recording modes on page 143 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec On The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit
on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If
the recording will not fit even at MN1(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the
recording will start at MN1 and stop when all the available space is used up.
Off • When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media, the
recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.
Subtitle Recording On The selected subtitle language is recorded with the D.TV timer recording.
Off • No subtitles are recorded with D.TV timer recordings.
Set Thumbnail 0 seconds • Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame
of the title.
30 seconds Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.
3 minutes Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into the title.
Auto Chapter (Video) No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes • When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10
minutes.
15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.
Auto Chapter
(DVD+R/+RW)
No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes • When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers are inserted every 10
minutes.
15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
DVD-RW Auto Init. VR Mode • Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording when loaded
into the recorder for the first time.
Video Mode Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode recording.
HDD Recording
Format
Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you
don’t need to transfer the recording later to a Video mode DVD.
Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings.
This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a Video
mode DVD as high-speed copy can be used.
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode
Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 133.
Setting Options Explanation
The Initial Setup menu
16
136
En
Playback
TV Screen Size 4:3 (Letter Box) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format pre-
sentation for widescreen material.
4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan presenta-
tion for widescreen material.
16:9 • Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how
4:3 material will look.
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override
this setting.
Still Picture Field Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.
Frame Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.
Auto • Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image.
Seamless Playback On Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit
points.
Off • You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback
of a VR mode Play List.
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.
Angle Indicator On • A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-
Video disc.
Off Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.
Parental Lock
Set Password /
Change Password
Next Screen If no password has yet been set, enter a four digit number to become your
password. If you want to change the password, first enter your old password,
then enter a new one.
DVD Playback Next Screen From this screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock
level for playback of DVDs with parental level coding.
D.TV Age Limit Next Screen Use this screen to enter an age limit for D.TV programs. Programs that are
broadcast with age suitability guidelines that fall above the age set here
will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be
viewed.
You must also enter your password in order to change the age limit setting.
This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France, Denmark, Finland or Sweden.
Setting Options Explanation
The Initial Setup menu
16
137
En
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)
Screen Resolution 1920 x 1080i Constant 1920 x 1080i output.
1280 x 720p Constant 1280 x 720p output.
720 x 576p Constant 720 x 576p output (for use with the 625 input line system).
720 x 480p Constant 720 x 480p output (for use with the 525 input line system).
720 x 576i Constant 720 x 576i output (for use with the 625 input line system).
720 x 480i Constant 720 x 480i output (for use with the 525 input line system).
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press ONE TOUCH COPY
while holding down the (STOP) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 132 to the
default setting).
4:3 Video Output Full Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio.
Normal Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3
video will be shown with bars on each side (unless the Screen Resolution
setting (above) is set to 720 x 480i or 720 x 576i).
Colour RGB (0–255) Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’ on the RGB (16–235)
setting.
RGB (16–235) Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the
RGB (0–255) setting.
YCbCr 4:2:2 The video signal is output as a 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is
the standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices.
YCbCr 4:4:4 The video signal is output as a 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4 component signal.
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.
Audio Output Auto • Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal.
However, depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio chan-
nels, and the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output.
PCM All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS).
Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio.
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.
Video Priority Mode HDMI • Select for high quality picture output on a connected HDMI display. How-
ever, on this setting the YNR and Detail picture quality settings are not
effective for analog video, and component video will be set to interlaced.
Component Select if you want the YNR and Detail picture quality settings to be
effective for both HDMI and analog video output, or if Component Video
Out is set to Progressive while an HDMI display is connected (page 132).
When watching video on an HDMI display, use the HDMI setting.
Options
On Screen Display On • The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen.
Off Switches off the on-screen operation displays.
Front Panel Display On •
The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby.
Off The front panel display is switched off in standby (although it still lights
dimly when setting a timer recording).
Setting Options Explanation
The Initial Setup menu
16
138
En
Additional information about the TV system
settings
About the input line system
This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC
and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input
Colour System settings determine how the recorder
treats incoming video signals from an external input.
Please note the following points when changing the
input line system:
When the current input is a built-in tuner channel
preset, changing the input line system will usually
also affect the input line system of the AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1 In setting is
set to Decoder, then the L2 input is affected instead.
If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the
screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your
TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the
front panel STOP button then pressing VIDEO IN
(also front panel) while the recorder is stopped.
When you switch the Input Line System setting the
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the
STOP button and VIDEO IN buttons as described
above, there is no confirmation, so please use with
care.
You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems
on the same disc.
When you change this setting, the Input Colour
System setting also changes (see below).
About NTSC on PAL TV
Depending on the Input Line System setting and the
NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when
the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table
below.
Remote Control
Mode
Recorder 1–3
(default: Recorder 1)
If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to
different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote
controller ID, press and hold RETURN/EXIT then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The
remote will only control a recorder with the same ID.
AV. Link This Recorder Only
Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are
not passed through to the AV output.
Pass Through
Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for
connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is
not passed through.)
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 129) to Off.
DivX VOD Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code. See DivX video com-
patibility on page 43 and DivX® VOD content on page 43.
Set Preview
(HDD only)
Quick Preview • When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from
throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally
from the beginning.)
Normal The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title.
CI Information Next Screen
This option displays a menu of CI card functions. Consult your service
provider for more information on the functions available.
Software Update Next Screen
The Software Update function can check for and download updated system
software for the digital tuner. See Using Software Update (Digital tuner) on
page 139.
Setting Options Explanation
Input Line System
NTSC on PAL
TV
Output when
stopped
625 System Off PAL
On PAL
525 System Off NTSC
On PAL–60
The Initial Setup menu
16
139
En
About the input colour system
The available options of the Input Colour System setting
depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below
shows the different options available.
Additional information about component
video output
If you switch the Component Video Out setting to
Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with
progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see
anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and
hold the STOP button on the front panel, then press
ONE TOUCH COPY. This will set the recorder’s video
output back to Interlace.
Selecting other languages for
language options
1 Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.
2 Select the language you want.
Select by language name: Use the / buttons to
change the language.
Select by code number: Press then use the number
buttons to enter the four-digit language code.
See Language code list on page 150 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
Using Software Update (Digital tuner)
The Software Update function can keep the built-in
digital tuner up to date with the latest system software.
You can either check for updates manually, or have the
recorder do it automatically at regular intervals.
Access the Software Update screen from the Options
menu.
There are three options available: Manual Update, Auto
Update and Technical Information.
Manual Update
Select Manual Update to check for updated software
immediately. If new software is found then it is
automatically downloaded and installed. The new
software will take effect the next time the recorder is
powered on.
If for some reason the new software could not be
downloaded successfully, a dialog box informs you of the
error. Press HOME MENU to exit or RETURN/EXIT to
return to the previous screen.
Note that channel information may be erased when
software update is used, and that timer recording will not
work during the update.
To cancel manual update before it has completed, press
HOME MENU.
Auto Update
By default, the Auto Update option is On, which means
that periodically the recorder will check for and update
the digital tuner software if it’s available. We recommend
that you leave this option On.
If new software is found and successfully downloaded,
the recorder automatically scans for new digital
channels, informing you if any are found (this is the
equivalent of using the Add New Channel option, found
in the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup menu).
Technical Information
This displays the current hardware and software version
numbers of the digital tuner.
Input Line System
Built-in
analog tuner
External
input
625 System Auto Auto
PAL PAL
SECAM SECAM
525 System n/a Auto
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
ENTER
ENTER
Basic
Digital Tuner
Analogue Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Initial Setup
OSD
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
DVD Menu Language
DVD Menu Language
Language
Number
English
0
5
1 4
Language
Additional information
17
140
En
Chapter 17
Additional information
Setting up the remote to control your
TV
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table on the following
page.
1 Switch on your TV.
2 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then
enter the maker code for your TV.
See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes.
If there is more than one code given for your make, input
the first one in the list.
If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the
table, you will not be able to use this remote to
control your TV.
3 Point the remote towards your TV and press
to check that the remote works with your TV.
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off.
If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.
Using the TV remote control buttons
The table below shows how to use this remote control
with your TV.
Button What it does
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
INPUT Press to change the TV’s video input
VOLUME +/– Use to adjust the TV volume
CHANNEL +/– Use to change TV channels
Additional information
17
141
En
TV Preset code list
Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using.
ACURA 644
ADMIRAL 631
AIWA 660
AKAI 632, 635, 642
AKURA 641
ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644
AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647
ANITECH 644
ASA 645
ASUKA 641
AUDIOGONIC 607, 636
BASIC LINE 641, 644
BAUR 631, 607, 642
BEKO 638
BEON 607
BLAUPUNKT 631
BLUE SKY 641
BLUE STAR 618
BPL 618
BRANDT 636
BTC 641
BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647,
656
CASCADE 644
CATHAY 607
CENTURION 607
CGB 642
CIMLINE 644
CLARIVOX 607
CLATRONIC 638
CONDOR 638
CONTEC 644
CROSLEY 632
CROWN 638, 644
CRYSTAL 642
CYBERTRON 641
DAEWOO 607, 644, 656
DAINICHI 641
DANSAI 607
DAYTON 644
DECCA 607, 648
DIXI 607, 644
DUMONT 653
ELIN 607
ELITE 641
ELTA 644
EMERSON 642
ERRES 607
FERGUSON 607, 636, 651
FINLANDIA 635, 643, 655
FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648,
653, 654, 655
FIRSTLINE 640, 644
FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645
FORMENTI 632, 607, 642
FRONTECH 631, 642, 646
FRONTECH/PROTECH 632
FUJITSU 648, 629
FUNAI 640, 646, 658
GBC 632, 642
GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618
GEC 607, 634, 648
GELOSO 632, 644
GENEXXA 631, 641
GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650
GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656
GORENJE 638
GPM 641
GRAETZ 631, 642
GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648
GRADIENTE 630, 657
GRANDIN 618
GRUNDIG 631, 653
HANSEATIC 607, 642
HCM 618, 644
HINARI 607, 641, 644
HISAWA 618
HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654,
606, 610, 624, 625, 618
HUANYU 656
HYPSON 607, 618, 646
ICE 646, 647
IMPERIAL 638, 642
INDIANA 607
INGELEN 631
INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642
INTERVISION 646, 649
ISUKAI 641
ITC 642
ITT 631, 632, 642
JEC 605
JVC 613, 623
KAISUI 618, 641, 644
KAPSCH 631
KENDO 642
KENNEDY 632, 642
KORPEL 607
KOYODA 644
LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648
LIESENK&TTER 607
LOEWE 607
LUXOR 632, 642, 643
M-ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655,
656, 607, 636, 651
MAGNADYNE 632, 649
MAGNAFON 649
MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629
MANESTH 639, 646
MARANTZ 607
MARK 607
MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648
MEDIATOR 607
MEMOREX 644
METZ 631
MINERVA 631, 653
MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631
MULTITECH 644, 649
NEC 659
NECKERMANN 631, 607
NEI 607, 642
NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648
NOBLIKO 649
NOKIA 632, 642, 652
NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652
OCEANIC 631, 632, 642
ORION 632, 607, 639, 640
OSAKI 641, 646, 648
OSO 641
OSUME 648
OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642
PALLADIUM 638
PANAMA 646
PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622
PATHO CINEMA 642
PAUSA 644
PHILCO 632, 642
PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656
PHOENIX 632
PHONOLA 607
PROFEX 642, 644
PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649
QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653
R-LINE 607
RADIOLA 607
RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602
RBM 653
RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662,
609
REDIFFUSION 632, 642
REX 631, 646
ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646
SABA 631, 636, 642, 651
SAISHO 639, 644, 646
SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643
SAMBERS 649
SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646
SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614
SBR 607, 634
SCHAUB LORENZ 642
SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647
SEG 642, 646
MCMICHAEL 634
SEI 632, 640, 649
SELECO 631, 642
SHARP 602, 619, 627
SIAREM 632, 649
SIEMENS 631
SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649
SKANTIC 643
SOLAVOX 631
SONOKO 607, 644
SONOLOR 631, 635
SONTEC 607
SONY 604
SOUNDWAVE 607
STANDARD 641, 644
STERN 631
SUSUMU 641
SYSLINE 607
TANDY 631, 641, 648
TASHIKO 634
TATUNG 607, 648
TEC 642
TELEAVIA 636
TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652
TELETECH 644
TENSAI 640, 641
THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663
THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648
TOMASHI 618
TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653
TOWADA 642
ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649
UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646,
654, 655
VESTEL 607
VICTOR 613
VOXSON 631
WALTHAM 643
WATSON 607
WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607
YOKO 607, 642, 646
ZENITH 603, 620
PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651
Additional information
17
142
En
Minimum copying times
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.
1
Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility.
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.
Note
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2x speed).
Rec mode
DVD disc type
DVD-R / 1x
DVD-RW / 1x
DVD-RW / 2x
DVD-R DL
DVD-RAM / 2x
DVD+R / 2.4x
DVD+RW / 2.4x
DVD+R DL
DVD-RAM / 3x
DVD-RAM / 5x
DVD-R / 4x
DVD-RW / 4x
DVD+R / 4x
DVD+RW / 4x
DVD-R / 8x /16x
DVD-RW / 6x
DVD+R / 8x /16x
DVD+RW / 8x
1x 2x 2.4x 3x 4x 6x
SEP 10 h 6 mins. 3 mins.
*1
2 mins. 1.5 mins.*1 1.25 mins.*1
SLP 8 h 7.5 mins. 4 mins.
*1
2.5 mins. 2 mins.*1 1.6 mins.*1
EP 6 h 10 mins. 5 mins.
*1
3.5 mins. 2.5 mins.*1 2.2 mins.*1
LP 4 h 15 mins. 7.5 mins. 6.3 mins. 5 mins. 4 mins. 3 mins.
SP 2 h 30 mins. 15 mins. 12.5 mins. 10 mins. 7.5 mins. 5.5 mins.
XP 1 h 60 mins. 30 mins. 25 mins. 20 mins. 15 mins. 11 mins.
Additional information
17
143
En
Manual recording modes
The table below shows the approximate recording times for the HDD and the different DVD types in each manual
recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents.
*1
The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.
*2
Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.
*3
Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.
Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format.
When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space (equivalent to one recordable DVD).
See also Recording on page 78.
Video mode Off (HDD)
VR mode (DVD)
Video mode On (HDD)
Video mode (DVD),
DVD+R/+RW
Resolution
*1
Level Rec. time Level Rec. time
Resolution
*1
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
MN 1 802 mins.
MN 1
*2,3
802 mins.
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
MN 2 720 mins.
MN 2
*2,3
720 mins.
MN 3 600 mins.
SEP
MN 3
*2,3
600 mins.
MN 4 480 mins.
SLP
MN 4
*3
480 mins.
MN 5 420 mins.
MN 5
*3
420 mins.
MN 6 360 mins.
EP
MN 6
*3
360 mins.
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
MN 7 300 mins. MN 7 300 mins. 352 x 480 /
352 x 576
MN 8 270 mins. MN 8 270 mins.
480 x 480 /
480 x 576
MN 9 240 mins.
LP MN 9 240 mins.
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
MN 10 230 mins. MN 10 230 mins.
MN 11 220 mins. MN 11 220 mins.
544 x 480 /
544 x 576
MN 12 210 mins. MN 12 210 mins.
MN 13 200 mins. MN 13 200 mins.
MN 14 190 mins. MN 14 190 mins.
MN 15 180 mins. MN 15 180 mins.
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
MN 16 170 mins. MN 16 170 mins.
MN 17 160 mins. MN 17 160 mins.
MN 18 150 mins. MN 18 150 mins.
MN 19 140 mins. MN 19 140 mins.
MN 20 130 mins. MN 20 130 mins.
MN 21 120 mins.
SP MN 21 120 mins.
MN 22 110 mins. MN 22 110 mins.
MN 23 105 mins. MN 23 105 mins.
MN 24 100 mins. MN 24 100 mins.
MN 25 95 mins. MN 25 95 mins.
MN 26 90 mins. MN 26 90 mins.
MN 27 85 mins. MN 27 85 mins.
MN 28 80 mins. MN 28 80 mins.
MN 29 75 mins. MN 29 75 mins.
MN 30 70 mins. MN 30 70 mins.
MN 31 65 mins. MN 31 65 mins.
MN 32 61 mins.
XP MN 32 61 mins.
LPCM 61 mins. LPCM 61 mins.
Additional information
17
144
En
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
Problem Remedy
The disc is automatically ejected
after closing the disc tray
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 41).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 152).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.
Can’t play a disc • Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 41).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 152).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for
the condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System
different to the current recorder setting.
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-once protected
recordings will not play in this recorder.
Can’t record a disc • Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 41).
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 87).
This can take up to 1 hour.
No picture • Check that everything is connected properly (page 46).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input.
The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV. Reset to
interlace by pressing and holding the front panel STOP button then pressing
ONE TOUCH COPY.
• If you are using an indoor antenna that requires power, make sure that Aerial Power
in the Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto (page 130).
• If the aerial/antenna is not connected properly, or if it is shorted, the Aerial Power
setting will revert to Off automatically. Check the aerial connection and try making
the setting again.
All settings are reset • If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all
the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power
cord.
Remote control does not work
If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the CONTROL IN jack,
point the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwoofer to use (page 14).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 138). (When
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 14).
• Replace the batteries (page 15).
Additional information
17
145
En
No sound or sound is distorted • Make sure that the receiver subwoofer or TV is set to the correct input and the
volume turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion
play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS audio can only be played back if the recorder’s digital output is connected to
the receiver subwoofer. If connected to your TV, your TV must have a DTS decoder for
you to be able to enjoy DTS sound.
• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 46).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
Cannot switch a bilingual program
• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and
sub channels are both output.
The picture from the external
input is distorted
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot
connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 138). (You can also change it by
pressing the STOP button and INPUT SELECT on the front panel simultaneously
with the recorder stopped.)
Screen is stretched vertically or
horizontally
• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 136) is correct for the kind of TV
you have (see also page 151).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input
signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen
signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.
Can’t play a disc recorded using
this recorder on another player
• If the disc was recorded in Video mode or DVD+R, make sure that it’s finalized
(page 86).
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video mode
and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW
compatible in order to play it (page 41).
Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM compatible
players (page 79).
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play
on other players. Finalize the disc and try again.
During playback the picture is
dark or distorted
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display
correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Can’t record or does not record
successfully
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
• For a Video mode disc or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:
– HDD: 999 titles
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc)
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 124).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc
has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV
system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System
setting to match what you want to record (page 138).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Problem Remedy
Additional information
17
146
En
Timer program doesn’t record
successfully
• When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV
tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 79).
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will
record completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
After briefly unplugging or after
a power failure the front panel
display shows ‘--:--’
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being
reset when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the
battery keeps all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other
recorder settings to use the recorder again.
Front panel display shows
‘LOCK’ when a button is pressed
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 71).
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD
to DVD)
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a Video
mode disc or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t finalized.
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for
recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable
titles may not decrease.
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn’t a
disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use.
If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One Touch
Copy will not work.
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over 8 hours long when copying to DVD+R/
+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles when copying
to DVD+R/+RW.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD
to HDD)
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than
999 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
The picture freezes and the front
panel and remote control
buttons stop working
• Press STOP then try restarting playback.
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then switch
back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold
STANDBY/ON for 5 seconds until the power switches off.
A device connected via USB does
to function.
• Check that it is a device that may be connected to this unit (digital camera, USB
memory, memory card reader or printer).
• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.
• Check that the USB device is powered on.
• Only the first digital camera, USB memory or memory card reader connected is
readable by this unit. Unplug multiple devices and connect the device you want to
use first.
Problem Remedy
Additional information
17
147
En
HDMI
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the
outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
Problem Remedy
The connected HDMI or DVI
device does not display any pic-
ture (and the front panel HDMI
indicator does not light)
• Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both
components is on).
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch on the HDMI/
DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder.
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-standard cable may
result in no picture being output.
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single cable to connect
devices together.
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following:
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x
1080i) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i) video input.
• If the HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output.
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.
No video from the HDMI output. If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see
any picture at all. In this case, press ONE TOUCH COPY while holding down the
(STOP) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component
Video Out on page 132 to the default setting).
There’s no sound from the con-
nected HDMI or DVI device.
• There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.
• Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that
came with the connected device).
Additional information
17
148
En
On-screen displays and recorder displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
Message Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the
recorder automatically initializes it.
• Incompatible region number. The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the
recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management data.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase
titles/chapters or combine chapters.
This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo
the finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to the disc.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it
and retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error
appears even with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer
Service Center.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display
may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged.
Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM compatible.
Cannot record this content using Video mode recording.
• This video cannot be recorded to DVD+R/+RW.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode
DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording.
• This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
• Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The
recorder may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer
Service Center.
• Repairing disc.
• Repairing the HDD.
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears
when the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut.
The contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press DISPLAY to clear message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the
operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center.
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can be done
using Disc Setup.
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping)
to maintain playback and recording performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can be done
using Disc Setup.
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to
maintain performance.
• The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized. Please
optimize again.
If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD
it is likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for
optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles
from the HDD and optimize again.
Additional information
17
149
En
• This channel’s TV system is different from the
recorder’s setting.
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is
different from the TV system settings of this recorder.
• Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. Press
DISPLAY to clear message.
The timer recording failed because the TV system of the
channel set for recording was different from the setting of
the recorder.
• Playback has stopped because the TV system is
different than the recording.
During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System
(PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing
playback to stop automatically.
• You are not allowed to watch this Conditional Access
Program.
A CA module or smart card (obtained from your service
provider) is required to watch the selected program. Insert
the supplied module or card into the Common Interface card
slot on the rear of the recorder (page 47).
There is no DV input or the input signal is unrecordable.
No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if
a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected
camcorder.
• No DV camcorder connected. The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder
is switched off.
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time.
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to just one
camcorder.
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder. Try switching
off the camcorder then turn it back on again.
• Could not operate the DV camcorder. This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder.
• The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please
select playback mode on the DV camcorder.
The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback
mode.
• Searching for a printer. Please wait a moment. To
cancel, press ENTER.
This message is displayed when the recorder is scanning for
a connected printer, or when the printer is not yet ready for
printing. If there is no printer connected, please connect one.
If the message does not disappear, try disconnecting then
reconnecting the USB cable.
(Note that this recorder may not work correctly with all printers.)
• The printer is not ready or is not
connected. Please check the printer.
This message is displayed when communication could not
be established with the printer. See the Troubleshooting
section if you do not know the cause.
• Printing has been canceled because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer error
during printing. After checking the printer for the cause of
the error, either reconnect the printer and start the printing
job again, or select "Yes" to resume printing (select "No" to
cancel the print job). See also the operating instructions that
came with your printer for possible causes of print errors.
Message Explanation/Action
Additional information
17
150
En
Language code list
Language (Language code letter), Language code
Country/Area code list
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Spanish (es), 0519
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Byelorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czech (cs), 0319
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Irish (ga), 0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Laotian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
Additional information
17
151
En
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting Appearance
16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at
the top and bottom of the screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the program are cropped so that the
picture fills the whole screen.
4:3 4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The program is presented correctly on either setting.
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting Appearance
16:9 16:9 The program is presented in widescreen.
4:3 16:9 Your TV will determine how the picture is presented—
check the manual that came with the TV for details.
Additional information
17
152
En
Handling discs
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly
from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a
circular motion.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.
Damaged discs
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging
the recorder.
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
Cleaning the pickup lens
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are
commercially available, we do not recommend using
them since some may damage the lens.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for
about an hour before switching on and using.
Additional information
17
153
En
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so
please bear in mind the following points when choosing
a suitable location for it:
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,
shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-
generating appliances.
Place on a window sill or other place where the
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use.
Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference—especially if the television uses
an indoor antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder
may be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.
Moving the recorder
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/ON
to switch the power to standby, checking that the
POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at
least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord.
Never lift or move the unit during playback or recording—
discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged.
Resetting the recorder
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
1 Make sure that the recorder is on.
2
Using the front panel controls, press and hold
STOP and press STANDBY/ON.
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
Additional information
17
154
En
Specifications
General
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 220 V–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 W
Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . 0.98 W
(Front panel display: off)
Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.8 kg
Dimensions . . . .420 mm (W) x 79 mm (H) x 319 mm (D)
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C
Operating humidity . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)
TV system . . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC (external input only)
Readable discs
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-
RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3,
JPEG, CD-DA, DivX)
Recording discs and formats
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode
DVD-RAM: VR mode
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode
DVD+R DL: +VR mode
Video recording format
Sampling frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz
Compression format . . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Recording time
HDD (160 GB)
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h to 455 h
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 13 h
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 8 h
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL
Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 14 h 21 m
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m
(DVD-R DL only)
Manual Mode (MN)
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m
Timer
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 month/32 programs
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Tuner (analog)
Receivable channels
Tuner (digital)
Receiving system . . . . . . . . . . .DVB-T (2 K / 8 K COFDM)
Tuner VHF/UHF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VHF band III (170 MHz to 230 MHz)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UHF band IV, V (470 MHz to 862 MHz)
Auto Channel Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 ch, Auto Preset,
Auto Label, Auto Sort
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stereo MPEG layer I/II
This product’s digital tuner has been confirmed for use in
the following countries: Belgium, France, Germany, Italy,
Spain, Denmark, Finland, Netherlands, Sweden, UK.
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Hyper
UHF
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Hyper
UHF
Channel
E2 to E4
X to Z
E5 to E12
S1 to S20
M1 to M10
U1 to U10
S21 to S41
E21 to E69
Frequency
47 MHz to 89 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz
302 MHz to 470 MHz
470 MHz to 862 MHz
Channel
A to C
X to Z
D to J
11, 13
S1 to S20
S21 to S41
E21 to E69
Frequency
44 MHz to 89 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz
302 MHz to 470 MHz
470 MHz to 862 MHz
SECAM B/G
PAL B/G
PAL I
Channel
FB, FC1, FC
F1 to F6
B to Q
S21 to S41
21 to 69
Frequency
49 MHz to 65 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz
300 MHz to 470 MHz
470 MHz to 862 MHz
Channel
R1 to R5
R6 to R12
S1 to S20
S21 to S41
E21 to E69
Frequency
49 MHz to 94 MHz
104 MHz to 300 MHz
302 MHz to 470 MHz
470 MHz to 862 MHz
SECAM L
SECAM D/K
PAL D/K
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Additional information
17
155
En
Input/Output
Antenna
. . . . . . . 75
IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (analog)
. . . . . . . 75
IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (digital)
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),
Input 3 (rear)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1),
RCA jack (Input 2, Input 3)
Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1),
RCA jack (Output)
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),
Input 3 (rear)
Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 )
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, Input 3)
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )
C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 )
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1),
4 pin mini DIN (Output)
Component video output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 )
P
B
, P
R
: 0.7 Vp-p (75 )
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks
RGB input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 )
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1)
RGB output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 )
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1)
Audio input. . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),
Input 3 (rear) L/R
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 k)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Input 2)
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 k)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1),
RCA jacks (Output)
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
Digital audio output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Coaxial
G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
Common Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA module
DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front)
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front)
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 pin
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.
PIN no. . . . . . . . AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G out / G in
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R or C out / R or C in
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B out / B in
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Video out or Y out / Video out
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
Supplied accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G-LINK™ cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (1.5 m and 30 cm)
Power cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Operating Instructions
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Note: The specifications and design of this product are
subject to change without notice, due to improvement.
This product includes FontAvenue
®
fonts licenced
by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC Corporation.
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
<MAN-RCS-656HX-EN>
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P. O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_A_En
45


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Pioneer RCS-656HX at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Pioneer RCS-656HX in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 9,22 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Pioneer RCS-656HX

Pioneer RCS-656HX User Manual - English - 156 pages

Pioneer RCS-656HX User Manual - Danish - 464 pages

Pioneer RCS-656HX User Manual - French - 155 pages

Pioneer RCS-656HX User Manual - Swedish, Finnish - 464 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info